Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (213 trang)

Giao an tieng anh 6

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (891.52 KB, 213 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span>PPre: 17/08/2012 Period 1: HƯỚNG DẪN CÁCH HỌC I. Mục tiêu: - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hiểu biết chung về môn học mới và biết cách học Tiếng Anh, biết nội dung của sách “Tiếng Anh 6” - Thái độ: Yêu thích môn học mới - Kỹ năng: Phát triển kỹ năng viết và nói của học sinh II. Phương pháp: - Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. Chuẩn bị: - Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, 1 vài bức tranh - Học sinh: sách tham khảo IV. Tiến trình lên lớp 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số HS vắng 6 2. Kiểm tra:(3’) GV kiểm tra sự chuẩn bị của học sinh 3. Bài mới:(35’) Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up: GV hỏi HS 1 số câu hỏi làm quen B. Presentation 1.Sơ lược về môn Tiếng Anh và SGK How many units are there in English book? Presents how many lessons in each unit EL là ngôn ngữ phổ biến nhất trên thế giới hiện nay… 2.Cấu trúc SGK Tiếng Anh 6 - T asks Ss to open their books. T introduces the strucsture of the “Tieng Anh 6”. - Sách gồm 16 đơn vị bài học (16 unit) Mỗi bài gồm 2-3 phần(A-B-C). 3.Giới thiệu cách học môn Tiếng Anh: - T introduces to Ss some ways of learning EL.. Students/ activities and contents. Tim e. 5’. Repeat in chorus - Ss open the book. Do following teacher statements - Listen and give ideas. - Take notes( Ss discuss in pairs to decide some best ways of learning El.). - Listen and copy down. 8’. 8’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span> * Present the class statements -Teacher statements: + Stand up, please + Go to the board, please + Come back your seat, please. + Write down, please + Hand up, please + Keep silent, please + Repeat/ again Listen and repeat + Give me some examples + Learn by heart vocabulary + Answer the questions  Gives the class regulations: (By Vietnamese) Asks the students to rebuild the class regulations. 8’ - Copy down on the notebook. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học và thực hành lại các cấu trúc - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 1: A – Hello (1-4) Rút kinh nghiệm: ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ........................ Pre: 19/08/2012 Period 2: Unit 1: GREETINGS Lesson 1: A – Hello (1-4) I. Mục tiêu:. 6’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span> - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng biết cách chào hỏi và giới thiệu bản thân (tên). Đọc được các số từ 0-5 . - Thái độ: Yêu thích giao tiếp với bạn bè - Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. Phương pháp: - Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. Chuẩn bị: - Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, 1 vài bức tranh - Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. Tiến trình lên lớp :1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số HS vắng 6 2. Kiểm tra:(3’) GV kiểm tra sự chuẩn bị của học sinh 3. Bài mới:(35’). Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up: T greets Ss B. Presentation + Pre teach: (vocabulary) - T. Elicits vocabulary - Present these vocabulary: Hello: Xin chµo (Translation) Hi: Xin chµo(Translation) Name: Tªn(Translation) Is/ Am: Lµ(Translation) I: tôi, tớ, mình(Translation) +Checking: R.O.R +Dialogue build:T sets the scene: Lan is talking to Nga,Ba is talking to Nam. -T elicits the dialogue. a.Lan: Hi, I am Lan Nga: Hi, I am Nga b.Ba: Hello, My name is Ba Nam: Hello, My name is Nam - T asks Ss to fill in the blank. - T Helps Ss practice dialogue in pairs - T asks Ss to work in groups of 4,. Students/ activities and contents. A1,3. Listen and repeat Listen and repeat in chorus and individually Copy down. SS play a game – work in pair. Ss work in pair to introduce yourself, for example: Hi, I am Lan SS listen and repeat in chorus and individually And then copy down on their notebooks -SS work in group: A-B -Each group has 6 students. Tim e 5’. 10’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span> Ss greet & introduce themselves. T checks some pairs. * Presentation 2: A2,4. Practice 1.Vocabulary: Write the letter on their notebook in + Pre teach: Present number 0-5: teacher|s order. - Oh: 0/ - One:1 - Two:2/ - Three: 3  Keys: - Four: 4/ - Five: 5 + Hi.I’m Lan +Checking: Slap the board. + Hello.My name’s Ba Practice: +Dictation:T reads: Oh- Five- OneTwo- Four…. -T asks –Students anwer in chorus -Calls some pairs to act out. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học, chào hỏi và giới thiệu bản thân, đếm số từ 0-5 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học và thực hành lại các cấu trúc - Làm BT 1,2/4/SBT - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 1: A - Hello (5-7) Rút kinh nghiệm: ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ........................ Pre: 20/08/2012 Period 3: Unit 1: GREETINGS Lesson 2: A – Hello (5-7) I. Mục tiêu: - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng đưa ra lời hỏi thăm sức khoẻ, chào hỏi 1 cách trôi chảy, đếm và viết được từ số 6-10 - Thái độ: Yêu thích giao tiếp và học hỏi cái mới - Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. Phương pháp: - Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. Chuẩn bị:. 10’. 10’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span> - Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh - Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. Tiến trình lên lớp :1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số 6 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết các từ đã học ở bài trước HS 2-3: Chào hỏi và giới thiệu tên 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities. A. Warm – up: -T sticks the poster on the bb. 1. rofu = 2.loelh = 3.enma = 4.ether = 5.ifev = - T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make them meaningful words . B.Presentation + Pre teach:Vocabulary:- T elicits words Fine, thanks: KhoÎ, c¸m ¬n(meaning) Miss: C«(meaning) (chưa co gia đình) Mrs:Bµ(meaning) Mr : ông, ngài.( đặt trc tên người đàn ông) +Checking: What and where: *Asks and answer about the health. -T sets the scene: Lan goes to school and meets Ba. She greats him. T elicit the dialogue. +R O R dialogue: a.Lan: Hi, Lan Nga: Hi, Nga Lan: How are you? Nga:I am fine, thanks + Model sentence: How are you? I am fine, thank you *A6(12): - T elicits 2 pics, asks Ss to make similar dialogue in pairs. - Then T checks some pairs. * A7(13): T asks Ss to fill in the gaps to make a completed dialogue between Nam. HS vắng. Students/ activities and contents. Tim e. 5’. *Answer keys: 1.four; 2.hello; 3.name; 4.three; 5.five. B5. Listen and repeat SS listen and repeat in chorus and individially And then copy down on their notebook. 10’. Work in group. Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions: + How are you? + I am fine. Copy down. -Practice with a partner . T: How are you? S:... Practice: -Go to the boarb and write down the old numbers( one by one). -Work individially.. 10’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span> and Lan. - T checks some pairs and corrects mistakes. +Revision numbers from 0 to 5: + Pre teach: Present number 6 to 10: - Six: 6 - Seven: 7 - Eight: 8 - Nine: 9 - Ten: 10 * Practice: + Dictation:-T. reads some telephone numbers. Asks students to listen and write down by English these telephone numbers: 820.029 / 950.443 / 22.653 / 621.590 / 510.682 / 768.527.. -Repeat in chorus and individial 5’ • Presentation : -Work in pairs.Listen to teacher and slap the word that they hear). - Students listen and write down by English these telephone numbers. Write down the words that they hear on their notebooks. Work in group(2 groups). 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học, chào và hỏi thăm sức khoẻ, đếm số từ 6-10 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học và thực hành lại các cấu trúc - Làm BT 3,4/P5,6/SBT - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 1: B 1-4 Rút kinh nghiệm: ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ..................Pre: 24/08/2012 Period 4: Unit 1: GREETINGS Lesson 3: B – Good morning (1-4) I. Mục tiêu: - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng sử dụng các lời chào như good morning/good afternoon/bye… để giao tiếp - Thái độ: Yêu thích giao tiếp với bạn bè và người thân bằng ngôn ngữ Tiếng Anh - Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. Phương pháp: - Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. Chuẩn bị: - Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài - Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. Tiến trình lên lớp :1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số HS vắng 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span> 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1-2: Chào hỏi, giới thiệu tên, hỏi thăm sức khoẻ HS 3: Viết các từ mới đã học 3. Bài mới:(30’). Teacher/ s activities. Students/ activities and contents Tim e A. Warm – up: 5’ - GV yêu cầu HS đứng dậy hỏi thăm sức Làm theo yêu cầu của GV khoẻ nhau B.Presentation + Pre teach: Present these vocabulary: B1. Listen and repeat 7’ Good morning:Chµo(Buæi s¸ng)Listen and repeat in chorus and picture -visual individually Good afternoon:Chµo(Buæi chiÒu) )Copy down picture Good everning:Chµo(Buæi tèi) )explaination Good night:Chóc ngñ ngonWork individually Meaning- trans -Go to the board and write down. Good bye:Chµo t¹m biÖt( MineSituation) Children:TrÎ em( picture- visual) We: (pro) chóng t«i,chóng tớ, chóng - work in pairs ta(ng«i 1 sè nhiÒu- situation) +Checking: R & R. - Ss listen. -Read in chorus, Half – half, T*:T elicits 5 pictures B1& helps Ss Ss, groups of table or groups of 3. practise greeting one another in pairs. B2. Practice: 5’ -Work in pairs Eg: S1- Good morning ! Example Exchange: S2- Good morning ! Picture drill. S1: Good (morning) -T runs through the pictures. S2: Good (morning) *Presentation dialogue - T sets the scene: Miss Hoa is talking to her Ss. T helps Ss read dialogue (a) P 15 in chorus, T-wc, S-S,Groups of 3,or groups of table… -T asks Ss to translate dialogue in to vietnamese (Note:We are = We’re). *Practice:T sets the scene: Lan meets. B3. Listen and repeat. - Ss translate dialogue in to vietnamese -Work in pairs following example exchange: S1: Seven and eight? S2: Fifteen. 5’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span> Nga when she goes to school. B4. Write - T asks Ss to fill in the gaps.Then T checks some pairs. T gives answer keys. *keys: + Nga: Good afternoon,Lan. + Nga: I’m fine, thanks. 8’. - Practice in pairs. - Listen and repeat in chorus 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học và thực hành lại các cấu trúc - Làm BT 1,2/P 6,7 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 1: C1-2 Rút kinh nghiệm: ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. .......................... Pre: 25/08/2012 Period 5: Unit 1: GREETINGS Lesson 4: C – How old are you? (1-2) I. Mục tiêu: - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng học và đếm trôi chảy các số từ 1 - 20 - Thái độ: Yêu thích học tập với các con số - Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. Phương pháp: - Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. Chuẩn bị: - Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài - Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. Tiến trình lên lớp :1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số HS vắng 6 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết và đọc các lời chào HS 2: Làm BT 1/P6 3. Bài mới:(30’). Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities and contents. Time.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span> A. Warm up T asks Ss to play the game “Jumble words” B. Presentation - Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and then repeat. T: turn the cassette on Ss: write the numbers they hear. 15. 10 8 17. 5 20. 6 19 14. 5’ igeht, neni, vesne, trehe C1. Listen and repeat 1 2 3 4 5 One two three four five 6 7 8 9 10 Six seven eight nine ten 11 12 13 14 eleven twelve thirteen fourteen 15 16 17 18 fifteen sixteen seventeen eighteen 19 20 Nineteen twenty - Ss repeat after the teacher - read in silence - some read again Ss: write the numbers in their notebooks. C2. Practice Ss: work in pairs, read and write the numbers Ss: play the game “slap the board”. 4 3 12. Round numbers Two , four , six , eight , ten , twelve , fourteen , sixteen , eighteen , twenty Odd numbers One , three , five , seven , nine , eleven , thirteen , fifteen , seventeen , nineteen * Comprehension check. 10’. 7’. Ss:- some count the round numbers. - some count the odd numbers. Ss: write on the board the numbers they hear from the teacher. Ss: one says the numbers in Vietnamese, one says in English and one writes on the board Ss: some read again the numbers on the board.. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học, đếm số từ 1- 20. 8’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span> 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng số từ 1-20 - Làm BT 1,2/P 7,8 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 1: C3-4 Rút kinh nghiệm: ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. .......................... Pre: 26/08/2012 Period 6: Unit 1: GREETINGS Lesson 5: C – How old are you? (3 - 4) I. Mục tiêu: - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hỏi và trả lời về tuổi của mình, so sánh “How old are you?” với “How are you?”. Giới thiệu người khác với cấu trúc “ This is…..” - Thái độ: Yêu thích học thêm cấu trúc giao tiếp mới - Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. Phương pháp: - Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. Chuẩn bị: - Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài - Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. Tiến trình lên lớp 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số HS vắng 6 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết và đọc các số từ 1- 10 HS 2: Viết và đọc các số từ 11- 20 HS 2: Làm BT 1/P7 3. Bài mới:(30’). Teacher’s activities A. Warm up Ss: one by one count from one to twenty B. Presentation. Students’ activities and contents. Time 5’. Number from one to twenty C3. Listen and repeat Ss: - listen to the tape twice and. 10’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span> T: Explain some new words and write them on the board. then repeat. - read in silence - some read again New words - this : naøy, ñaây - how old : bao nhieâu tuoåi - year(s) old : tuoåi Ss: listen and repeat after the teacher ( choral and individuals). T: Explain the structure and give example - make the conversation - Distinguish between - ‘How old are you?” and “How are you” T asks Ss to practice ask and answer about the age T check Ss’ mistakes * Comprehension check Numbers 12 15 16 3 20 11 5 1 19 17. * Ask and answer about the age. How old are you? – I am……… Ex: How old are you? – I am eleven. - Hello. This is………….. - Hi………. - How old are you? - I’m……….. - Ss listen and take notes C4. Practice Ss: work in group of three, practice greeting, asking and answering about the age. Ss: practice in group in front of the class.. 7’. Ss: practice ask and answer about the age in front of the class. (each student chooses one of the pieces of paper and uses the number in it to answer the age).. 8’. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học, hỏi về tuổi tác 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Hỏi và trả lời về tuổi tác và giới thiệu được bạn mình - Làm BT 3,4 /P8-10 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 2: At school ( A 1-3) Rút kinh nghiệm: ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span> ................ Preparing day: The 7th period Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 1: A – Come in ( 1 - 3) I. MỤC TIÊU. - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hiểu mệnh lệnh trong lớp học như: come in, sit down…..1 cách trôi chảy, hiểu được các yêu cầu của GV bằng Tiếng Anh - Thái độ: Giúp HS yêu thích giao tiếp Tiếng Anh trong lớp - Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. CHUẨN BỊ. - Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài - Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV.TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1-2: Hỏi thăm sức khoẻ, tuổi HS 2: Làm BT 4/P10 …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up:(5’) *Noughts and crosess: -Play a game in two teams 9-5 20- 10+2 7 17+1 6+5 6+8 3-3 6×3 5+3 B .Presentation:(12’) - T sets the scene: At the. -Then copy down answer keys A1. Listen and repeat. + Pre teach:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span> classroom, teacher says sth to her Ss. T elicits 6 pictures & helps Ss practise these sentences. - Concept check: + Asks Ss to translate these sentences in to Vietnamese. + Use: imperatives. - T introduce newords - Check: R.O.R C.Practice:(13’) - T helps Ss read 5 phrases in the box & runs through 5 pictures. - T asks Ss to match the imperatives with the pictures. - T gets feed back. + Mime drill: - T asks Ss to look at T’s actions and says:Teacher mines: Simon sayS: A3 p.22: -T helps Ss play “ Simon says” to practise the imperatives. Listen and repeat in chorus and individially -Copy down. -Come back your seat. - Clap your hand -Read 5 phrases in the box. -Work individually - Match the imperatives with the pictures.Work in pairs. -Go to the boarb and write down -Listen and practice - Ss translate in to Vietnamese. Look at T’s actions then say in chorus.. (To) come in: mời vào (To) sit down: Ngồi xuống (To) Stand up : đứng lên (To) open your book : Mở sách ra (To) close your book: gấp sách lại. A2 - Match and write: * - come in / sit down / Stand up / - open your book / close your book. A3 – Play Simon Says *Student say: -come in/ sit down / Stand up - open your book / close your book. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học, thực hiện thành thạo các mệnh lệnh trong lớp học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Làm BT 1,2/P11 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 2: At school ( B1, 3) V .RÚT KINH NGHIỆM.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span> ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ............... Preparing day: The 8th period Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 2: B – Where do you live? (1,3) I. MỤC TIÊU. - Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hiểu và thực hành cấu trúc “Where do you live?”, đọc được bảng chữ cái bằng Tiếng Anh - Thái độ: Giúp HS yêu thích học tập chữ viết Tiếng Anh - Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV.TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết các từ mới đã học HS 2: Thực hiện các mệnh lệnh của GV HS 3: Làm BT 2/11 …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up: (5’) Whole class do after Simon says the teacher’s teacher saying command: - come in/ sit down/ Stand up/ - open your book/ close your book B1. Listen and repeat B. Presentation:(12’) (to) Live: Sống Coppy down and repeat (trans) - T sets the scene: Lan in chorus. (in) a house: Ngôi nhà meets a school boy on a.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span> street(Nam).They are talking to each other. - T elicits vocabulay.. -Go to the boarb and match -Work in pairs. *Checking:Matching - Asks Ss listen to the dialogue and repeat. Let Ss practise speaking in pairs. C.Practice: (13’). -Work in group to make questions and answer following Example exchange:. Picture (on) a street:Con đườngDraw (in ) a city:Thành phố– (trans) (at) 12 THD street (trans). *Example exchange: S1: Where do you live? S1: Where do you live? S2: On (Le Loi street) S2: On (Le Loi street) Listen and repeat in - T selects out model B3. Listen and repeat chorus sentences and write on Model sentences: -Work individially board. 1. Copy down A: Where do you live? Concept check: meaning, B: I live on Tran Phu -Listen and repeat in form, use . street + Pre teach(Vocabulary): chorus. In: a house/ a city/ Hue/ - T elicits vocabulary : - Listen and copy down. Viet nam. -(to) spell: đánh vần * Use: Hỏi và trả lời nơi Work individially +T helps Ss read the bạn em hoặc ai đó sinh alphabet again. sống. -Copy down on their - Checks Ss’ 2. How do you spell it? pronunciation if neccesary notebooks. Bạn có thể đánh vần nó không? -Work individual The ABC: -ABCDEFG -HIJKLMNOP - QRSTUVWXY Z. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học, hỏi và trả lời về chỗ ở, đọc bảng chữ cái Tiếng Anh 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Làm BT 1,2/P12 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 2: At school ( B4-5).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span> V .RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ................... Preparing day: The 9th period Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 3: B – Where do you live? (4-5) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hiểu và thực hành cấu trúc “What’s your name?”, thực hành các mẫu câu hỏi đã học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS yêu thích liên kết giao tiếp các câu hỏi bằng Tiếng Anh.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span> 3.Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV.TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết các từ mới đã học HS 2: Đọc bảng chữ cái bằng Tiếng Anh ……………………………………………………………………………… 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm up: (5’) -Answer T’s questions Where do you live? *Free talking How old are you? - T asks Ss some How are you? B4. Listen and repeat: questions Example exchange: B. Presentation(12’) -Coppy down and repeat S1: What’s your name? - T presentation dialogue. in chorus. S2: My name’s …. * Use: asks and answer T sets the scene: The T about name. meets one of her Ss and -Work in pairs * Form: ask her some questions. -T helps Ss read -Work in group to make -What’s your name? - My name’s + tên mình. dialogue : pairs. questions and answer - How do you spell it? - Let Ss practise the -Copy down Eg : dialogue in pairs T: What’s your - T helps Ss select out name? model sentences: Lan: My name’s Lan. -Concept check: T: How do you spell meaning,use,form. - Ss enjoy practicing it/ your name? C. Practice(13) Lan: L-A-N,Lan. -T runs through word Listen and repeat in * Practice: cues. chorus and individially Word cues drill. -T helps Ss practise Khoa Mai Lam speaking : T-WC; halfCopy down Son Loan half; pairs. -T models: -Asks Ss practise in.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span> pairs,ask and answer the real name. Then T gets feedback. - T runs through the questions from a) to d).. Work in group to guess the leters of the words. -Work in groups of 4 or 3. - Asks Ss to write the answer . - T gets feedback.. S1: What’s your name? S2: My name’s Khoa. S1: How do you spell it? S2: K-H-O-A,Khoa B5. Write the answer a) My name’s .. c) I live in/on… b) I’m 12. d) L-a-n,Lan. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Làm BT 3-6/P12-13 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 2: At school ( C1) V .RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ............. *******************************. Preparing day: The 10th period Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 4: C – My school (1) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng sử dụng cấu trúc “This is…/That is….”, và các câu hỏi Yes/No.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span> 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu trường lớp 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV.TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1-2: Hỏi và trả lời các câu hỏi đã học ở những bài trứơc (tên, tuổi, sức khoẻ, phát âm tên…) …………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up:(5’) Answer T’ questions 1. Listen and repeat - Free talking *Vocabulary B .Presentation(13’) (a) student: häc sinh(example) - Listen and repeat in (a) teacher: gi¸o - Presentaion dialogue: viªn(example) chorus and individially -T sets the scene: Ba (a) school: trưêng Copy down introduces about his häc(example) school and his class; He is (a) class: líp häc(example) talking to Nam. Asks Ss to (a) Classroom: phong học Listen to and repeat the (explain) listen to the radio and radio in chorus. (a) desk: bµn häc(Realia) repeat in chorus T elicits vocabulary on the *Practice board. - work individually. - This is my school. - T corrects Ss’ - Is this your school ? Yes,it is. pronunciation -That is my student. * Check: R & R - Ss select out the model -Is that your student? No,she - T helps Ss select out the sentences isn’t. model sentences: * Grammar note: *a) This is my school/ a) Giới thiệu người or vật ở Work in pairs to ask and father. gần hay ở xa: answer the questions That is my desk/ mother. This / That + is+ my + N(số ít) and the word cues *b)Is this/that your b) Hỏi đoán và trả lời về người teacher/desk? or vật ở gần/ xa: -Copy down form on C.Practice(12’).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span> Word cue drill: - T runs through the word cues. a) This/school (√ ) b) That/class(x) c)This/classroom (√) d) That/book(x) e)This/teacher/he(√) f)That/student/she(x) + T models:. their notebook.. + Is this/ that + your + N( vật số ít)? -Work individually. Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t.( isn’t = is not). Work in chorus, Work in + Is this/that + your + N ( người số ít)? pairs Yes,he/she is / No, he/she isn’t. Yes,it is /No, it isn’t. Copy down then practise in pairs Work in pair. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Làm BT 1-2/P 14-15 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 2: At school ( C2, 3) V. RÚT KINH NGHIÊM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ........... ************************. Preparing day: The 11th period Unit 2: AT SCHOOL Lesson 5: C – My school ( 2,3) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng biết thêm các từ vựng về trường lớp, thực hành các cấu trúc “What’s this?/What’s that?”…… 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu trường yêu lớp 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span> II.PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Change roles, pairs work, groups work III.CHUẨN BỊ:. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Làm Bt 1/14 …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up:(5’) Scals = class; Play game: Jumbled eachrte = teacher words Sked = desk; choosl = school C2. Listen and repeat B.Presentation:(15’) 1.Vocabulary – T elicits vocabulary on -Listen and repeat in chorus. (n) door: cöa chÝnh/ (n) window: cöa sæ board. (n) board: b¶ng/ Use pictures and realias -Work individually. (n) clock: đång hå to present vocabulary: -Copy down on the (n) waster basket: Thùng rác - T corrects Ss’ notebooks. (n) school bag: cặp sách pronunciation if (n)pencil: bút chì/ -Retell some words necessary (n) pen: bút mực Work in group +Checking: R & R. (n) ruler: thước kẻ / - Practice with the new words (an) eraser: cái tẩy. +Dialogue build:- T 2. Practice elicits dialogue. - Do pair work to practice Eg: with the dialouge T: What is this/that? - Concept check: S:It is a door/an eraser. + Meaning: T asks Ss T: How do you spell it? translate dialogue in to - Guest the uses of the new S:D-O-O-R? Vietnamese. structure with What 3. Structure notes - T asks Ss to practise + Form: asking and answering What’s this/that? with real things in or It’s+a/an+N(số ít) around class in pairs; T-.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span> Wc ; … C. Practice(10’) *Wordsquare: -Presentsthe wordsquare & asks Ss to work in pairs to find out the words by circling the word. -Devides the class into two groups to practice. - Corrects & comments.. - Practice with the structure -Play a game in 2 teams.. +Use: Hỏi và trả lời về tên đồ vật ở gần or xa. Eg: What’s this? – It’s a ruler. C3.Practice with a partner. - Playing the game in groups by answering theSquestions. WP E N C E X O E D D C L R D D N E O H O A R - Correcting N C S the O mistakes. O C S A I I K R O K E O WL R U L E R B. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Làm BT 3/P15-16 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 3: At home ( A1-2) V.RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. **********************. Preparing day: The 12nd period Unit 3: AT HOME Lesson 1: A- My house ( 1-2) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hiểu biết thêm về chủ đề mới, biết các từ vựng về ngôi nhà, học và thực hành cấu trúc “What are these/those..?” 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu ngôi nhà của mình 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span> Change roles, pairs work, groups work III. CHUẨN BỊ:. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Làm Bt 3/P16 HS 3-4: Thực hành hỏi và trả lời với “What’s this/that?” ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up(5’) - Work individually A1. Listen and repeat D. E. S. K. 1. Vocabulary: Lucky number: (a) lamp: đèn điện 1. How do you spell C .L .A .S .S .R .O .O .M ( explain ) DESK ? 2. How do you spell (a)bookshelf: Giá C .L .O .C .K CLASSROOM ? sách( explain ) 3.LUCKY NUMBER (a) chair: ghế tựa P. E .N .C .I .L 4. How do you spell (a)couch: ghế dài CLOCK ? R .U .L .E .R (an) armchair: ghế 5. How do you spell PENCIL ? bành(có tay vịn2 bên E .R .A .S .E .R 6. How do you spell (a) table: bàn (có thể RULER ? dùng làm bàn ăn) 7. LUCKY NUMBER (a) T. V: Ti vi (explain)= 8. How do you spell -Repeat in chorus and Television ERASER ? individually 9. LUCKY NUMBER (a) stool: ghế đẩu ( trans) 10. How do you spell (a) stereo: radio,đài - Practice with the new WINDOW ? (realia) words B .Presentation:(15’) - Repeating in chorus & A2. Practice with a - T uses pictures and partner in individual. realias to present - Making sentences for +Model sentences: vocabulary: the next cues. -What is this?/that? - Practicing in groups & It is a table in pairs . -What are these?/those? - T checks Ss’ -Work in pairs. They are tables pronunciation + Form: C. Practice(10’) -Copy down on the What are these/those?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span> *Check: matching. -T runs through pictures. - Give examples and ask ss to guess about the uses of the structures. notebook. They are + N(e/es) - Ss use realia things in Use : The ways to asks classroom to ask and and answer about the answer about the name name of things ( near or of things. far) Eg: S1:What is this? This/that( singular) S2: It is a…. => These/those ( plural) - T gets feedback, corrects S1:What are those? Note: the mistakes. S2:They are ……. Thông thường thêm “s” -What are these? – vào sau dt số ít, những dt Theyare tables có tận cùng là: - What are those? – They o/x/ss/ch/sh/.. + “es”. are … Nếu kết thúc là “f” thì - feedback and correct chuyển F→ V+ es. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học: từ vựng về ngôi nhà và cấu trúc với danh từ số nhiều 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Làm BT 1-2/P17-19 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 3: At home ( A3-4) V.RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ........ Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày…tháng…năm….. Ngày soạn: The 13rd period UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 2: A- My house ( 3, 4) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng biết các từ vựng về gia đình, thực hành với các cấu trúc “ Who is this?.......” 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu gia đình mình 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span> III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV.TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2 – 3: Hỏi và trả lời với các gợi ý: a)What/this?/television.. HS vắng. c)What/that?/lamp.. b)What/these?/stool. d)What/those?/bookshelf …………………………………………………………………………………… …. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities A. Warm- up(5’) -noughts and crosses.. Students/ activities. -Play the game in B-Presentation(10’) 2 groups A-B Pre- teach: -Guess the -Explaination meaning of the -Picture words *Check the vocab -Listen and repeat R.O.R - Copy 2-Presentation text - Rewrite the A3; P-32 number words on ? Read the text to fill by one the Gird. - Work in pairs fill the Gird - Give the infomation about Ba,Nga........ *Dialogue Build -In Pairs read the ? Read in pairs dialogue -Work in pairs ask and answer . C.Practice: (10’) *Wordcue Drill: ? Practice with. -Work in pairs - Read before class. contents I-Vocabulary: - Family: gia đình (situation) - Father : bè,ba (visual ) - Mother: MÑ, m¸ (visual ) - Sister : chÞ g¸i, em g¸i (…) - Brother: anh trai,em trai(…) * Ba’s family Tªn Ba Nga. Quan hÖ. Tuæi. NghÒ nghiÖp. mother. * Grammar note: + Form: -Who + is + this/that? It’s his/her + N(số ít) -What + is + his/her name? His/Her name + is + tên * Dialogue Build S1: Who’s that? S2: It’s his mother S1: What’s her name? S2: Her name’s Nga II-Practice: Ex: S1: Who’s that?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span> model (cards) in pairs.. S2: That’s his mother/father/sister S1: What’s his/ her name? S2: His/her name’s Nga/Ha/Lan. D.Production(5’) ? Students draw their famlies. III :Further practice * Discrible and Draw. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học - HS vẽ gia đình mình và thực hành hỏi: S1: Who's this? S2: It's my... S1: What's his/her name? S2: His/her name's ... 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và cấu trúc mới - Làm BT 3,4/ P19- 20 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 3: At home ( B 1-2) V.RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ......... **************************. Ngày soạn: The 14th period UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 3: B – Numbers ( 1-2) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng học các số từ 21 – 100 để đếm các đồ vật, và biết thêm về cách phát âm danh từ số nhiều 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu các con số, các đồ dùng 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span> II.PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài. 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2 : Làm BT 3/P 19 HS 3: Đọc bài khoá về gia đình Ba và dịch ………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A.Warm – up(2’) Count the numbers Revision some of the from 1 to 20 numbers from 0 to 20: 0, 1, B1. Listen and repeat the …..9/10/7/25/5/29/1/15….20 numbers B.Presentation(10’) - Số chẵn chục: - Use the card to present Forty: 40 Listen and repeat in Thirty:30 voabulary: Fifty: 50 Sixty:60 chorus and - Introduces the words by individially Seventy:70 Eight:80 explaining the meaning, Copy down Ninety: 90. using the situation. One hundred:100 - Reads the words for the - Số lẻ modal (3 times ). Then helps twenty-one SS to repeat ( 2 times ). twenty-two… - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the Thirty-one mistakes. thirty-two… B2. Practice Work in groups of 4 * check: what and where. S1: There one door C.Practice:(12’) Work in pairs S2: And there are 22 desks + Snakes and ladder: B1 -Work in pairs P.35 - Gives instructions. Help Ss Play agame in table /s/ /z/ /iz/ play a game in groups of 4. Eg: + Realia drill: B2 P.36. -S1: There is one desks Rulers - Asks Ss to practise door. Benches speaking(use real things.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span> around the classroom) D.Further practice(6’) -T runs throught the pics in B2. Ss count things in the pictures and fill in to boxes below the picture.Then check Ss’ answer. -Helps Ss pronounce the plural nouns -Gives the rules of ending sounds:/s/;/z/;/iz/. - T asks Ss put the words in 3groups according to the pronunciation:. S2: And there are 22 desks -Work in individially. Students Tables Couches Books Doors Houses Clocks Windows lamps. Students write: + /s/ :nouns ending in: Ks,ps,ts + /iz/:nouns ending in: ches,shes,ses,ges,xes,zes. + /z/: the rest nouns. - Work in groups 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ và đếm được các số từ 21- 100, viết được ra - Làm BT 1,2 / P21 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 3: At home ( B 3- 5) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ......... ******************************. Ngày soạn: The 15th period UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 4: B – Numbers ( 3- 5) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng thực hành các câu hỏi về số lượng dựa vào cấu trúc “ How many….”, thực hành với các con số để nói về các đồ trong phòng học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu các con số, các đồ dùng 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span> II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, 1 vài bức tranh, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(10’) HS 1: Viết 5 câu sử dụng “ There is…/There are…. HS 2: Làm BT 1/P 21 HS 3: Làm BT 2/P 21 ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. Bài mới:(28’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Thực hành thành thạo cấu trúc “How many …..are there?” - Làm BT 3,4 / P22 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 3: At home ( C 1-2) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ......... Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày…tháng…năm….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span> Ngày soạn: 19/9/2014. PERIOD: 16 UNIT 3: AT HOME Lesson 5: C – Families(1-2). I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng đọc hiểu bài khoá về gia đình Lan, hỏi và trả lời về nghề nghiệp. 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ hiểu biết và yêu thích từng nghề riêng.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span> 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III.CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(10’) HS 1: Answer the questions: C1(38) 1.How many tables are there?/.2.How many armchairs are there? 3.How ……? / 4.How many people …? ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(28’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up(3’) - do the practice in +Write it up: From I.Vocabulary: groups survey lesson 4 (an) engineer: kĩ sư Ask students to talk : (a) doctor (picture):bác sĩ (a) nurse (picture):Y tá “There are/ is......” How old.....? B. Presentation(25) - Listening to the What does he/ she do? words. 1.Pre- reading:(5’) - Introduces the words - Repeat in chorus by explaining the then in individual. * Guessing meaning, using the Lan|s family Giving the situation. meaning & the -Reads the words for Father 40 an pronunciation. the modal (3 times ). engineer Then helps SS to Mother 35 a teacher -Copying the words. repeat ( 2 times ). Brother 8 a student - Checks S’s reading in -Working in Lan individual to find individual & corrects out the jobs & the mistakes. - Writes the words on comparing in pairs. II. Grammar note: the Bb & checks the meaning & the - Giving the *Hỏi và trả lời về nghề nghiệp: information & pronunciation. What does he/she do? correcting. - Introduces the - He/she is a teacher/an requirement (luat)& engineer. ask Ss to work in + What do you/they do? Working in pairs to - I’m a student individual to find out.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span> the jobs. Open prediction:Asks Ss look at the picture C1 & guess information to fill in the table: 2.While reading(13’) Asks students to read C1 P.38 to check their predictions. Comprehension questions: -Asks Ss read the text again & answer the Qs in pairs. -Gets feedback 3.Post reading:(7’) – Talk about Song’s family basing on the family tree(p39).. guess about Lan’s family: Reading C1 P.38 to check their predictions. Working in groups to ask and anwer the question in C1 P.38. - They are students III.Practice: 1.Answer the questions b) He is forty. c) He is an engineer d) She is thirty five e) She is a teacher f) He is eight g) He’s a student h) They are in the livingroom. 2. Talk about Song’s family *Eg: This is Song’s family.There are four people in his family: his father;his mother;his sister and him. This is his father. He’s a doctor.He’s forty two years old.This is his mother. She’s a nurse.She’s thirty nine.His sister is fifteen.She’s a student.. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng các từ mới và cấu trúc. Làm BT 1-5/ P23-27 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Grammar practice V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 19/9/2014 PERIOD: 17 GRAMMAR PRACTICE I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng thực hành về động từ “tobe”, các câu mệnh lệnh, các con số, từ để hỏi, “There is…/there are…”…...

<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span> 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thích thêm về sự phong phú của Tiếng Anh 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II.PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III.CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra:(8’) HS 1: Viết và đọc từ mới HS 2: Đọc và dịch bài khoá về gia đình Lan HS 3: Làm BT 2/23 ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up: I.Grammar: Free talking: Ask Ss 1.To be: some questions *Subjects: B. Presentation: - Work individually. I _ am -Gap fill: Grammar practice 1-3 P.40 - Work in group to make You/ We/ They _ are She/ He/ It _ is sentences with To be. -Retell the forms of *.Answer keys: theVerbs : "To be” - Working in individual 1./ am – am – are – is – C. Practice: to fill in the gaps. are. - T explain and model: 2./ am – is – is – are – *Ex1-3(40) - Comparing in pairs & are. – T helps Ss do exercise giving the information. 3./ a) are – am; b) is – is. - T gets feedback. Ss play in two groups by c) is–isn’t ;d) are – aren’t. choosing the cue & *. word cues drill: - Asks Ss look at the making question. Eg:They are teachers. picture (p41) and answer 1.They/teachers the question in pairs. 2.We/students Work in individially + Gap fill: Grammar 3. She/ a nurse practice 4 P.40 4.He/ an engineer -Introduces the 5.I/ a student requirement & ask Ss to 6.They/ sister work in individual to fill 2. Imperative in the gaps..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span> +Game: Simon says + Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 P.41 –Retell the questions words they’ve learned. Asks them to make questions for answer given: * Exer7 (P42) - Asks Ss to write the words for the numbers & write the numbers for the words. D. Production – Elicits the picture quiz +Crossword Puzzle:. Work in pairs:. SS draw their own pictures of furniture on scrap of paper and ask following the example exchange. V(nt) + C *Answer keys: a)come in b) sit down. c) open your book e) stand up. d) close your book. 3Question word: *Answer keys: a) What - is b) Do - live. c) Who - is d) What - is. 4.Numbers: + Anwers key: a.How old are you? b.How many poeple are there in your family?........ c. What is your name? ………. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Thực hành và làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập 1-10 trong SGK P40-43 - Làm BT Test /P 32-34 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Written test 1 RÚT KINH NGHIỆM ....................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 19/9/2014 PERIOD: 18 WRITTEN TEST 1 I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có cơ hội kiểm tra khả năng Tiếng Anh của mình qua các bài 1-3 đã học, giúp giáo viên kiểm tra đánh.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span> giá được khả năng của từng học sinh. 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ ý thức học tập bộ môn tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Kiểm tra viết III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (1’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra 3. Bài mới:(40’) I. Ma trận: Matrix :. Topic. Knowing TN TL. I.Listening. 5. II.Reading III.Language Focus. Understanding TN TL. 5 10. ,5 5. 2,5. 2,5 10. 2,5 5. 10. 2,5. 10. 5,0. Total 5. 2,5. IV.Writing Total. Using TN TL. 5. 2,5 2,5. ,5 5 ,5 25 0. II. Đề bài: I . Listening : ( 2m ) * Listen to the passage and fill in to the blanks. 1. Hi . I’m Ba. I’m ………………………….. years old .I’m a student 2. This is my father. His name’s Ha .He is a ………………………………….. 3. This is my ………………………... Her name’s Nga .She is a teacher, too.’ 4. This is my sister , Lan .She is fifteen. She is a student .I’m her …………………………… II.Grammar: ( 4m) * Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5m) 1.This is my.......................... a.hello b.hi c.family d.fine 2.We are in the ............................. a.living room b.window c.table d.door 3.There are four..............in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.. 2. 2 2 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span> a.dogs b.people c.window d.chairs 4. My mother is thirty-five....................old. a.year b.years c.age d.ages 5. She is a................... a.doctors b.nurses c.teachers d.student 6. We.........................on Tran Hung Dao street.. a. address b.is c.live d.are 7. ........................are you? I am fine, thanks. a.Where b.what c.How d.Who 8. Is this .................... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend. a.his b.her c.my d.your 9. This is.................eraser ? a. on b. an c. a d.in 10. What is your......................? - My name is Lan. a.name b.student c.teacher d.friend II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5m) A B 1.What is this? a. Yes,it is. 2.Are these your pens? b. It’s a book. 3.Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street. 4.Who is that? d. No, it isn’t. It’s his ruler 5.Where do you live? e. No, there aren’t. 6. Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai III. Reading : ( 2.0 m ) This is Song’s family.There are four people in his family: his father;his mother;his sister and him.This is his father. His name is Ha. He’s a doctor.He’s forty two years old. This is his mother. She’s a nurse. She’s thirty nine. His sister is fifteen. She’s a student. * Answer the questions : 1. How many people are there in Song’s family ? …………………………………………………………………………………… … 2. What is his father name? …………………………………………………………………………………… … 3. What does his father do ? …………………………………………………………………………………… … 4. How old is her mother ? …………………………………………………………………………………… … V. Put the words in the corects order. (2 m) 1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /. .......................................................................................... 2 . / my / this /teacher / is / ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span> ......................................................................................... 3. / an / he / engineer / is /. ........................................................................................... 4. /name/ her/ is / Nga/. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV thu bài, nhắc nhở thái độ của HS 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 2’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các BT. Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 4: A (1,2) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ........ Duyệt tổ chuyên môn Trình Văn Đảm.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span> Ngày soạn: 19/9/2014 PERIOD: 19 UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL Lesson 1: A- Where is your school? (1,2) I.MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng đọc hiểu bài khóa về trường học , thực hành trả lời câu hỏi Yes/No qua việc sử dụng sở hữu cách 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu trường yêu lớp 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra(8’) Trả lời một số câu hỏi về thông tin cá nhân ……………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up:(3’) +Pelmanism: Work in group I Thu She. He. You. His My Your Her Thu’s B. Pre- reading:(7’) - use the pictures to elitcit - lead them to repeat - Check vocab : R.O.R - ask Ss to predict about Phong’s school and Thu’s school. - listen and repeat chorally ,individually →give meaning →stress - copy down. A1. Listen and repeat. 1.Vocabulary : -big (a) : to ,lớn -small (a) : nhỏ - the city : thành phố - the country : miền quê 2.Matching : 1.Phong’s school 2.Thu’s school a. Big b. small c. In the country.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span> - have them close their books C.While-reading :(10’) - ask Ss to open their books ,read the text and check their predictions. - close the books and predict. - ask Ss to ask and answer - open the books ,read the question in pairs the text and check the - use the text to elitcit and predictions ask them to give model - work in pairs to ask sentences - get them to repeat T- Ss , and answer S1-S2 - Ask Ss to give the form D.Post-reading(10’) - repeat in choral,in Phong’s school pairs Thu’s school big / small ? Your school in the city / country? Your house - work in pairs. d. in the city A2. Answer 1.Comprehension question : a.Yes,it is b.No,it isn’t c.It is in the country d.It is in the city 2.Model sentences : A:Is Phong’s school small ? B: Yes,it is A: Is Thu’s school small ? B:No,it isn’t Form : TO BE + S +N / Adj ? Yes,S + To be No,S + To be +not *Possessives “s” My pen Lan’s pen Her house Hoa’s house 3.Yes / No question answer drill S1:Is Phong’s big ? S2:No,it isn’t S1:Is it in the country ? S2:Yes,it is. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học: Yes/No questions và sở hữu cách 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới, đọc và dịch bài khoá - Làm BT 1,2/P35,36 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 4. A3,4 V.RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... .........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span> Ngày soạn: 22/9/2014 PERIOD: 20 UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL Lesson 2: A- Where is your school? (3,4) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hiểu biết thêm về các con số và các từ vựng trường học 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu trường yêu lớp 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra(8’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc và dịch bài khoá , trả lời 1 số câu hỏi HS 3: Làm BT 1/P35 ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up(3’) +Bingo: SS choose 5 numbers Elicit and list numbers on from the board the board:2, 5, 8,100, 200,400,32,54,600, 900, 10 - close the books and A3.Read.Then answer the predict about numbers : questions. - T reads: 200, 5, 400 , 900 , 8 , 20 8,32,54,900 *Answer the questions 1. Where is Phong’s school ? B.Pre reading:(7’) - work individually - in the country Asks them to guess what - read the text and 2. how many classrooms are these numbers are about , check prediction there in Phong’s school ? to do with school: - 8 classrooms 400, 900, 8, 20 EX: student, teacher,.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span> desks, window... C.While reading:(10’) - Asks ss to read the text A3P.45 to correct their prediction - have Ss open their books ,read the text and check their predictions - give feed back - give the answer given and ask Ss to put questions - ask them to work individually →work in pairs : ask and answer D.Post reading:(10’) - ask them to depend on where Ss live in the city or the country to write about their own school - feedback and correct. - ask and answer in pairs. - write about your school. 3. how many students are there in his school ? - 400 students 4. where is Thu’s school ? - in the city 5. Is it small ? - No, it isn’t .it is big 6. how many classrooms are there in Thu’s school ? - 20 7. how many students are there in her school? - 900 4.Practice *Transformation writing : My school is in the country . it is small …. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học: Thực hành về số và từ vựng trường 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới, đọc và dịch bài khoá - Làm BT 3,4/P36, 37 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 4. B1-5 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... .........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span> Ngày soạn: 22/9/2014 PERIOD: 21 UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL Lesson 2: B – My class (1-5) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng hiểu biết thêm về các con số và các từ vựng trường học 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu trường yêu lớp 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁ: Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra(8’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc và dịch bài khoá , trả lời 1 số câu hỏi ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Bài mới:(30’) Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A.Warm up Ss: look at the Talk about the number picture in books of floors and the (page 47) and answer B1. Listen and repeat.Then practice position of class 6A. some questions the dialogue with a partner B. Presentation about the number of 1.New words loudly floors and the -grade (n) : T: explain some new position of class 6A. -class (n) : -floor (n) : words and write them - listen to the tape -the first floor: on the board. twice -the second floor : -have/ has (v) : - read the dialogue 2. Structure notes - repeat the new -Which grade is Thu / Phong in? words after the -Where is her / his classroom? teacher. C.Practice Ss:- listen to the tape B2. Complete the table T: require students read again and repeat..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span> the cardinal numbers from one to twenty. - read in silence to get information - play roles of Thu T: introduce the ordinal and Phong numbers and write - answer the them on the board. questions about Thu and Phong T: tell the difference in - complete the table. using between cardinal - write three and ordinal numbers sentences about them and give examples. - repeat after the teacher. (choral and T: ask students to read individuals) the words or phrases - work in pair to they use to complete complete the the dialogue. dialogue in part B.5 - repeat the completed dialogue after the teacher. - some pairs play the D. Production roles of Thu and Ask ss to work in Phong and read groups loudly Check ang correct. Grade 7. class. floor 2nd. Thu Phong you B3. Write sentences about you - which grade are you in? - Which class are you in? - Where is your classroom? B4. Listen and repeat Ordinal Numbers 1st First nd 2 Second rd 3 Third th 4 Fourth th 5 Fifth th 6 Sixth th 7 Seventh th 8 Eighth th 9 Ninth th 10 Tenth Ex: My School Has 3 Floors. This Is The Second Floor. B5 .Compelte the dialogue - No. It’s small - does - has - are - am - is - on. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học: Hỏi đáp về thông tin trường lớp 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới, đọc và dịch bài khoá - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Test correction V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...... Duyệt tổ chuyên môn Trình Văn Đảm.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span> Ngày soạn: 22/9/2014 PERIOD: 22 TEST CORRECTION MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể đánh giá lại kiến thức mình đã học được, rút kinh nghiệm những lỗi hay mắc phải. Giáo viên đánh giá được kỹ năng của từng học sinh, và phương pháp dạy học của mình 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ học tập tốt hơn 3.Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, bài kiểm tra, thang điểm, đáp án 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra(8’) HS 1: Viết số thứ tự từ số 1 đến 10 HS 2: Làm BT 4/P38 Hs 3-4: đọc và dịch bài khoá ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(30’) A. GV nhận xét thái độ làm bài của học sinh, nhắc những lỗi HS hay mắc phải (7’) - Còn nhầm lẫn nhiều ở câu 8 bài II giữa các tính từ sở hữu: my, your - Kỹ năng nghe tốt, hầu hết các học sinh điền được bài nghe - Bài tập nối cũng phần lớn học sinh nhầm lẫn giữa câu 2 và 3, giữa câu hỏi số ít và số nhiều: Are there….; Is there…? - Khuyến khích ưu điểm và nhắc nhở những nhược điểm của HS B. GV trả bài, chữa lỗi từng bài tập cho HS (23’) Question I: Listening: 2 đ - Mỗi câu trả lời đúng đạt 0,5 đ 1. eleven. 2. teacher. 3. mother. 4. brother.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span> Question II: Grammar * Choose the best answer: 2,5 đ: Mỗi đáp án đúng đạt 0,25 đ 1. c. 2. a. 3. b. 4. b. 5. c. 6. c. 7. c. 8. d. 9. b. 10. a. * Matching: 1 đ: Mỗi câu trả lời đúng đạt 0,25 đ 1. b. 2. e. 5. c. 6. d. 3. a. 4. f. Question III. Read. Then answer: 2 đ: Mỗi câu trả lời đúng đạt 0,5 đ 1. There are four people in his family 2. His name is Ha 3. He is a doctor 4. She is thirty – nine Question IV. Put the words in the correct order: 2 đ. Mỗi câu đúng đạt 0,5 đ 1. How many people are there? 2. This is my teacher 3. He is an engineer 4. Her name is Nga 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV thu lại bài, nhắc nhở HS 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại các BT trong SBT - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 4: C – Getting ready for school (1-3) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM :. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... .........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span> Ngày soạn: 22/9/2014 PERIOD: 23 UNIT 4: big or small Lesson 4: C - Getting ready for school (1-3) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể thực hành thì hiện tại đơn với câu khẳng định của động từ thường, biết các từ vựng về thói quen 1 học sinh thường làm vào mỗi buổi sáng 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thích sự chuẩn bị trước khi đến trường 3.Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP: Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra(8’) Talk about your school ……………………………………………………………………………………. 3.Bài mới:(30)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up(3’) - Play game: Jumbled words Mngiron = morning Oloshc = school ……. B. Presentation(7’) -Use the pictures on p.49 Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal. Then helps SS to repeat - Checks S’s reading in. Students/ activities - worrk in groups. - Repeat the words in chorus & in individual. - Give the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copy the words. Correcting the mistakes.. contents C1. Listen and repeat. *What do you do every morning? (to)get up: Thức dậy (to)Get dressed: Mặc quần áo (to)brush your teeth: đánh răng (to)wash your face: rửa mặt (to)have breakfast: ăn sáng (to)go to school: đi học + Model sentences:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span> individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words + Checking: Slap the board Thøc dËy MÆc quÇn ¸o §¸nh r¨ng Röa mÆt ¨n s¸ng §i häc C1.P.49 C.Practice:(10’) Word cue drill: Chaining game following the example exchange: S1:What do you do every morning? S2: I get up S2:What do you do then? S1: Then I get dressed. Then……. Reads the first model & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. D. Production(10’) Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .. Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Copy down. 1.What do you do every morning?. get up Read the dialogue in I brush my teeth individual. have breakfast Correct the pronunciation. 2.What does Ba/ He/ She do every morning? Work in pairs to Ba gets up at 6 oclock practice the form: brushes his teeth Work in pairs to has breakfast practice the model goes to sentences: school C2. Practice with a partner What does Ba/ He/ She do Ss work in group of 7. every morning? Ba gets up at 6 Repeat in chorus & in oclock individual. EX: Make sentences for the S1:What does Ba do next cues. every morning? Practice in groups & S2:Ba gets up in pairs . S2:What does he do Correct the then?..... pronunciation. S3: Then he gets dressed Then…… C3: Write it up: +Write 5 sentences about what YOU do every morning. Begin with: Every morning, I get up. Then I............. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Câu khẳng định ở thì hiện tại đơn với ngôi thứ 3 số ít: thêm s hoặc es 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới. Làm BT 1,2/P 41 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 4: C – Getting ready for school (4-7) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span> ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ......... Ngày soạn:………… PERIOD: 24 UNIT 4: Big or Small Lesson 5: C - Getting ready for school (4-7) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có khả năng thực hành hỏi và trả lời về thời gian, về các việc làm buổi sang 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ đi học và làm việc đúng giờ 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp II. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Thứ Ngày tháng. Tiết. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Làm BT 1/P 41 ………………………………………………………………………………………. 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up(5’) Free talking: What do you do every morning? How namy floor does your school have? Which grade are you in? Which class are you. Students/ activities. contents. Answer T’s questions Work in individially. Listen and repeat in. C4-5. Listen and repeat 1. Vocabulary: -The time: thời gian -Ten oclock: 10 giờ.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span> in?...... B.Presentation:(15’) Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. T reads the text aloud. Ask Ss to understand the text Following the T checks Ss’s answer. chorus and individially Copy down Repeat the words in chorus&in individual. Give the meaning & the pronunciation. Copy the words Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Ss work in pairs, look at pictures C5, ask and answer about the time Following the example exchange: S1: What time is it? S2:It is eight oclock.. C. Production(8’). SS work in pairs to ask and answer about Ba. Ask ss to ask and answer with their partners about themselves. SS work in pairs to ask and answer about their partners. -half past ten: 10 giờ 30 phút -(to) be late for: Muộn Eg:“We are late for school” 2.Model sentenses:Hỏi giờ +What time is it? (Bây giờ là mấy giờ?) It is eight oclock. ten fifteen. half past ten. a. What time is it? It’s 10 o’clock b. What time is it? It’s ten ten c. What time is it? It’s ten fifteen d. What time is it? It’s half past ten C6- 7. Read. *Example S1:What time do you get up? S2:I get up at six S1: What time does Ba get up? S2: He gets up at six o’clock ……………………………… *Note with “s” and “es”. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Hỏi và trả lời về thời gian - What time is it ? It’s ………. 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới. - Làm BT 3,4/P 41-42 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 5: A – My day (1,2) V.RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span> ...................................................................................................................................... ....... Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2014. Ngày soạn:…………. PERIOD: 25 UNIT 5: things i do Lesson 1: My day (A1-2) I.MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh thể sử dụng các chủ ngữ I/she/he để nói về các thói quen hàng ngày 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thói quen thực hiện các hoạt động hàng ngày 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP: Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ 1. Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Thứ Ngày tháng Tiết Lớp Sĩ số HS vắng 6A 6B 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết c ác gi ờ sau: 10h30; 8h45; 6h10; 11h15; 9h30 HS 2: Làm BT 4/P 42 ……………………………………………………………………………………… …. 3.Bài mới:(28’). Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:(5’) + Guessing game: SS choose a time and complete the sentence: It is ............nine fifteen.......... Students/ activities. Work in individially. contents.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span> Example: S1: Is it half past eight? S2: No, it is not. A1. Listen and repeats 1. Vocabulary: (to) do your homework: Listen and repeat in chorus Lµm bµi tËp (to) play games: Ch¬i trß B.Presentation(15’) and individially ch¬i Introduces the words by Copy down explaining the meaning, using the situation. Checks S’s reading in Reading the dialogue in *Model sentence: individual & corrects the individual. to Correcting the Everyday I go mistakes. school. pronunciation. Writes the words on the she goes Working in pairs to Bb & checks the meaning answer. Then giving the & the pronunciation. A2. Ask and answer Introduces & Helps Ss to keys. Repeating in chorus & in listen to the text. 1./ What does Nga do Asks Ss to read the text in individual. Making sentences for the everyday ? individual. - Everyday she gets up Introduces the questions & next cues. asks Ss to work in pairs to Practicing in groups & in 2./ What does she do answer. everyday morning? pairs . Correcting the -Every morning she goes to C.Production(8’) school. pronunciation. +Survey: 3./ What does she do work in groups Take the survey about your everyday afternoon? partners’ rutine -Every afternoon she plays games. 4./ What does she do everyday evening? -Every evening she does her homeworks.. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới. Đ ọc b ài - Làm BT 1,2 /P44 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 5: A – My day (3,4) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span> ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ......... Ngày soạn: The 26th period PERIOD: 26 UNIT 5: things i do Lesson 2: My day (A3-4) MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh th ể sử dụng thì hiện tại đơn và “Wh” questions để nói về hoạt động hàng ngày của mỗi người 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thói quen thường xuyên thực hiện các hoạt động hàng ngày 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, tranh ảnh, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (8’) HS 1: Đ ọc b ài A1 v à tr ả l ời c ác c âu h ỏi HS 2: Làm BT 1/P 44 HS 3: L àm BT 2/P 44 ……………………………………………………………………………………… ….. 3.Bài mới:(30)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up(5’) Frtalking:B.Presentation:(15’) T introduces newwords Corrects Ss’ pronunciation Checking: Matching + Ordering vocabulary:. Students/ activities What do you do in the evening? What time do you get up?....... contents A3. L isten and r epeat 1. Vocabulary (to) listen to music: (picture): Nghe nh¹c.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span> T reads: Every morning, Lan gets up and listen to music. every afternoon she comes home and does the housework. then she washes T.V Every evening she reads and does her homework. (to) watch T.V: (picture) xem ti vi (to) do the housework: Listen and repeat in (picture) Lµm c«ng viÖc nhµ chorus and (to) read: (picture): §äc individially 2.Model sentence: - What do you do after Copy down - Copying down the school? words listening to the – I watch TV. sentences & take note the right order. Checking&correctin Model sentence: g - What does [Ba / Lan…] Readingthedialogue do after school ? –[ He/She] watches TV. individually. Correcting the A4. Ask and answer pronunciation. Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. Asks Ss to read the text in individual. C.Production(8’) +Picture drill: A3 P.53 Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat Repeating in chorus in chorus & in individual. Practices with Ss & checks & in individual. Making sentences S’s practicing in groups & in for the next cues. pairs . Corrects S’s pronunciation & Practicing in groups & in pairs . comments. Correcting the pronunciation. Working in groups to choose the cue & make the question & the answer.. *Example exchange: S1: What does Ba do after school? S2: [ He watches TV]. S1: What does Lan do after school?? S2: [ She does the h ouse work ]. ……………………………. *Further practice: +Noughts and crosses: He/play games She/brush her teeth Lan/ do the house work. 4. Củng cố: (2’) GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: What does [Ba/Lan…] do after school ? –[ He/She] watches TV. Write it up: Or ss orally report back: Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen……… 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới v à c ác m ẫu c âu h ỏi - Làm BT 3 /P44,45 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 5: A – My day (5,6).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span> V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ......... Ngày soạn:…….. PERIOD: 27 UNIT 5: things i do Lesson 3: My day ( A5- 6 ) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh th ể sử dụng thì hiện tại đơn và Yes/No question với dạng trả lời ngắn để nói về hoạt động hàng ngày của mỗi người 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thói quen thường xuyên thực hiện các hoạt động hàng ngày 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Thứ Ngày tháng. Tiết. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Hỏi và trả lời 1 số câu hỏi HS 3: L àm BT 3/P 44 .................................................................................................................... 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities contents A. Warm – up:(5’) + Pelmasim: 1. Go to do listen Work in groups to watch 2. school homework music TV Listeningtothe words. A5. L isten and r epeat B .Presentation:(15’) Repeating the words 1.Vocabulary Introduces the words by in chorus & in to) play volleyball: Ch¬i bãng.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span> explaining the meaning, individual.Correcting using the situation. the mistakes. Reads the words for the Giving the meaning modal . Then helps Ss to & the pronunciation. repeat Copying the words. Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words Practicing the dialogue in groups & Introduces & Helps Ss to in pairs. Correcting the listen to the dialogue. Asks Ss practice the pronunciation. dialogue in groups & in Filling in the table in individual, correcting pairs. Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to practice in groups & in pairs. + Grid: asks ss to read the dialogue and make a grid about Nga, Thu, Lan, Vui, girls with answer C.Practice:(8’) Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .. chuyÒn (to) play football (soccer): §¸ bãng (to) play sports: Ch¬i thÓ thao a girl: C« g¸i, c« bÐ 2.Model sentence:  Do you / they play volleyball ?  -Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.  Does she / he play soccer ?  -Yes, she / he does ; No, she / he doesn’t (*) Name Vui Nga Lan Thu. Volleyball. Football .   . A6. L isten and answer Example exchange: S1:Do you play sports? Repeating in chorus S2: Yes, I do/ No, I don|t & in individual. Making sentences for S1: Do you / they play the next cues. volleyball ? Practicing in groups & S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / in pairs . they don’t. Correcting the S1: Does she / he play pronunciation soccer? S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he doesn’t. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Yes/No questions với thì hiện tại đơn 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới và các mẫu câu hỏi - Làm BT 4,5,6/P45-47.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span> - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 5: B – My routine (1-3) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ........ Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2014 Ngày soạn:…….. PERIOD: 28 UNIT 5: things i do Lesson 4: B - My routine (1-3 ) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC:. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh thể đọc hiểu 1 bài truyện tranh về Ba để hiểu về hoạt động hàng ngày của bạn ấy. Thực hành thêm về thì hiện tại đơn 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thói quen học tập và làm việc đúng giờ 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: phòng học bộ môn 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Thứ Ngày tháng. Tiết. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Hỏi v à trả lời 1 số câu hỏi với Do/Does HS 3: L àm BT 4/P 45 ……………………………………………………………………………………… … 3.Bài mới:(28’) Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up(3’) + Jumbled words: okhueowsr= housework tislen= listen ader= Read. Students/ activities. Work in groups. contents.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span> B.Pre- reading:(8’) Introduces the words by explaining the meaning and using the situations Reads the words for the modal then helps Ss to read. Guess the meaning of the words Listen and repeat in chorus and individially Asks ss to fill in the time in Copy down the table for Ba: practice with the Introduces the pictures & new words asks Ss to guess the times - Guessing the times on which Ba does his daily on which Ba does his routine & fill in the table daily routine & fill in part 2 on page 57. the table part 2 on - Asks Ss to give their page 57. prediction. - Giving their C.While reading:(8’) prediction. - Ask ss to read the text to check their predictions and - Reading the text . complete the last column - Checking the in the B2 table(about me) prediction. D.Post reading:(9’) - Filling in the table - Gives the requirement & in individual, ask Ss to work in groups to correcting . ask each other the - Working in groups questions : - Reporting the a./ What time does Ba get information about up / Go to school / have their friends. classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ? b./ What time do you get up / Go to school / have - Do pair work classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ?. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới và các mẫu câu hỏi. B1. Read *. Vocabulary (to)take a shower:T¾m vßi hoa sen (to) eat: ¨n (to) start: b¾t ®Çu (to) finish : KÕt thóc (to) have lunch : ¨n trưa (to) go to bed: §i ngñ B2. Complete the table Action Time Ba You Get up Go to school Classes start Classes finish Have lunch Go home Go to bed B3. Practice. Ask and answer Answer: Action Get up Go to school Classes start Classes finish Have lunch Go home Go to bed. Time Ba 6:00 6:45 7:00 11:15 11:30 5:00 10:00. You 5:30 6:00 7:15 11:30 11:45 4:30 10:00.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span> - Làm BT 1,2,3/P47-50 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 5: C – Classes (1) V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM:. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ......... Ngày soạn: The 29th period PERIOD: 29 UNIT 5: things i do Lesson 5: C - Classes (C1-3) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC : 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh thể nói về thời khoá biểu ở trường. Học được các từ vựng môn học, các thứ trong tuần, hỏi và trả lời được thời khoá biểu cả tuần học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thói quen chuẩn bị và học bài đầy đủ trước khi tới trường 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, tranh ảnh, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc và dịch bài khoá HS 3: L àm BT 1/P 47 ………………………………………………………………………………………. 3.Bài mới:(28’) Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:(2’) Free talking:. Students/ activities Answer T’s questions +What time do you get up? B. Presentation:(10’) - Introduces the words by +What do you do every. contents C1. Listen and repeat. 1. Vocabulary: a timetable: thêi kho¸ biÕu English : TiÕng anh Math: M«n to¸n.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span> explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal Then helps Ss to read - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Checks S’s reading & the ordering. C. Practice(10’) - Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to practice in groups & in pairs. - Corrects & comments. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal Then helps Ss to read - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. D. Productioon(6’) - Introduces the dialogue & asks Ss to work in pairs to predict the missing words of the dialogue & fill in.. Literature: M«n V¨n History: M«n lÞch sö Geography: Môn địa lý Monday : Thø hai - Repeating the words in Tuesday: Thø 3 chorus & in individual. Wednesday: Thø 4 Thursday: Thø 5 Correcting the mistakes. Friday: Thø 6 Saturday: Thø 7 - Repeating in chorus & Sunday: CN in individual. - Making sentences for 2. Model sentence -What do we have today ? (?) the next cues. - We have English (+). - Practicing in groups & - I don’t have my timetable (-). C2. Listen and repeat in pairs . Monday : Thø hai -Correcting the Tuesday: Thø 3 Wednesday: Thø 4 pronunciation. Thursday: Thø 5 Friday: Thø 6 - Predicting the missing Saturday: Thø 7 CN words of the dialogue & Sunday: C3. Listen and repeat filling in. Nga: When do we have...............? - Giving & Checking Ba: We have it their prediction. on...........and............... - Practicing the dialogue Nga: When do have........................? in pairs. Ba: We have it on...........and............... -Correcting Nga: Does Lan have math pronunciation. on.....? Ba: ............................ - Do pairwork afternoon? -Listening to the words.. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Cách hỏi và đưa ra thời khoá biểu 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới và các mẫu câu hỏi - Làm BT 1,2 /P50,51 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Grammar practice.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span> V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ............. Ngày soạn: The 30th period PERIOD: 30 GRAMMAR PRACTICE I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể ôn lại các kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học, về thì hiện tại đơn, nói về thời gian, các từ để hỏi, các môn học và ngày trong tuần 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS hiểu rõ tầm quan trọng của các kiến thức ngữ pháp 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra Kiểm tra trong bài 3.Bài mới:(38)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up(2’) Free talk B. Presentation:(13’) +Realia drill: Grammar practice:2 P.60 - Introduces the example. Students/ activities. contents I.Telling the time Repeating in Example: chorus & in S1:What time is it? individual. S2: It is seven - Making sentences a. seven b. nine fifteen for the next cues. c. four thirty d. twelve Practicing in groups & in pairs . II.Question words.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span> exchange & the picture then helps Ss to practice.. - Correcting pronunciation.. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. Work in pairs - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .. the - How do you spell your name ? - What do you have today ? - What time do you get up ? - Which grade are you in ? - When do you have math ? - What time do you go to school ? - What do you do after school ? - What do you do in the afternoon ?. - Working in to work in individual to interview each other by making the Yes / No question & fill the information in the table.. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. C. Practice(15’) Asks ss to make questions - Workk in pairs - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments D. Production:(10’) - Ask ss to talk about their - talk about routine routine - check and remark. III.Adj with be Example exchange S1: Is your {house} big? S2: Yes,it is /No it is not. IV.Present simple tense Example : S1:What do you have on Monday ? S2:We have [math] & {English]. S1:Do you have [history] on Monday ? S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. V. Further practice: My routine I get up at 5:00 then I…........... ………………………………….... 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Ôn tập các kiến thức ngữ pháp 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập - Học ôn các kiến thức ngữ pháp V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... .........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span> Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2013. Ngày soạn: The 31st period UNIT 6: PLACES Lesson 1: A – Our house (1-3) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể đọc hiểu bài khóa về Thuy, về nơi bạn ở và thực hành với các từ vựng mới 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thiên nhiên, yêu ngôi nhà của mình 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) I. Choose the best answer: ( A,B or C) 1.I usually go to school _________ the morning. A. for B. at C. in D. on 2. We live in Hue, but my uncle_________ in Ho Chi Minh City. A. to live B. living C. live D. lives 3. ___________ you learn French? – No I don’t A. Would B. can C. Do D. does 4. How__________ bananas are there on the table? – There are some. A. many B. much C. long D. often 5. __________ do you do when it is hot? – I do swimming..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span> A. Who B. What 3.Bài mới:(28)’. C. When. Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:(3’) Free talking: -Where do you live? -How old are you? -How old is your mother? -What is your father’s name? B. Presentation:(10’) - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. + Open prediction: What are near Thuy|s house? C. Practice(10’) +Check their predictions: Asks ss to read the text in A1 P.62: Our house +Ordering vocabulary: P.62: T reads thesecond bubble aloud: “ It is beautiful here .There is a river and……near our house.” +Comprehension questions: A1P.62 Questions: a-f - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to answer. Then give the keys. D. Production(5’) - Introduces the pictures on page 62/63 & the example exchange & Helps Ss to. D. Where. Students/ activities - Answer - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Predicting “What’s near Thuy’s house” & write 3 things in their books. - Giving the prediction. - Reading the text . - Checking the prediction - Comparing & giving the information.. contents A1. Listen and read 1. Vocabulary A lake: hồ A river: sông A tree: Cây A flower: Bông hoa A rice paddy: cánh đồng A park: công viên A yard(n): sân 2.Answer: 1./ She is twelve years old. 2./ She is a student. 3./ Her brother’s name is Minh. 4./ He is twenty. 5./ Thuy lives in a house. 6./ A lake, a rice paddy, a park, a river, a hotel A2. Practice with a partner *Example : A: What’s that ? B: It’s a [river]. A: What are those ? B: They are [trees].. - Working in pairs to answer. Then giving A3. Write. Complete the the keys. sentencces Keys: -Work then compare - Our house has a yard. It is with partner near a rice paddy - There is a hotel near the lake - There is a river and a park - There are trees and flowers in the park.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span> practice. +Write it up: A3 Ask Ss to work individually to P.63 complete sentence 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: What’s that?/What are those? 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới và thực hành lại các câu hỏi - Anser: What is near your house? - Làm BT 1,2 /P60,61 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ........ Ngày soạn: The 32nd period Unit 6: PLACES Lesson 2: A – Our house (4-6) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC:. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể miêu tả nơi mà họ sống sử dụng những từ vựng và cấu trúc đã học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thiên nhiên, yêu ngôi nhà của mình 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP:. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc bài A1, dịch và trả lời 1 số câu hỏi HS 3: Làm BT 1/P 60 ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up(3’). Students/ activities. contents.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span> Game: Hangman Rice paddy, flower B. Presentation (10’) -T. explains request of the listen -T plays the cassette T calls on some Ss to read words - corrections -Ask Ss to listen the tape again and write the sentences you hear - use picture to elitcit - run through the pictures and model the first picture - lead them to repeat in choral ,individual C. Practice(10’) - ask Ss to work individually - call on some Ss to show before the class -lead them to work in groups to say about there is …. D.Production:(8’). Play the game. - Ss repeat the 1. Vocabulary: - a town (n) : thị xã words in part A4 - a village (n): làng - hotel(n): khách sạn - country: nông thôn -write them on the - rice paddy: cánh đồng board. lúa - river: dòng sông -Practice with the newwords. - work individually. - work in groups. - ask them to work individually to write 5 sentences about their places - call some Ss to go to the board - ask the whole class to look at and correct. A4. Listen. Write the words you hear. * Write it up : - write 5 sentences about their place. A5. Write sentences about your places There is a hotel near our house There are trees near our house There is a river near our house There is a lake There is a school … *Chain game : S1:There is a hotel near my house S2:There is a hotel and a school near my house S3:There is a hotel ,a school and a park near my house S4:There is a …... 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Miêu tả xung quanh ngôi nhà 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới và thực hành lại các câu hỏi.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span> - Làm BT 3 /P61 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ......... Ngày soạn: The 33rd period Unit 6: PLACES Lesson 3: B – In the city (1-3) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể hiểu 1 cách chi tiết về các từ vựng ở thị trấn và giới từ chỉ thời gian 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu cảnh quan, yêu khu vực lân cận khu mình sống 3.Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP: Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ: 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số HS vắng 6A 6B 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết 5 câu về những thứ xung quanh nhà mình HS 2: Làm BT 3/P62 ……………………………………………………………………………………… ….. 3.Bài mới:(28)’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span> Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities A.Warm up (3’). contents. B1. Listen and read Free talking: 1.New words - Is Minh in the -next to (prep) : cạnh bên country or in the -in (pre) : ở -listen to the tape city? -store (n) : cửa hiệu part B.1 twice and -bookstore (n) : hiệu sách the repeat. - What are there in -restaurant (n) : nhà hàng -pick up new the picture? (answer -temple (n) : đền words from the in Vietnamese) -hospital (n) : bệnh viện reading -factory (n) : nhà máy - repeat the words B. Presentation -museum (n) : bảo tàng after the teacher. (10’) -stadium (n) : sân vận động -listen to the tape -explain the new -neighborhood (n) : hàng xóm and repeat the words and write -work (v) : làm việc reading some times them on the board. 2. Practice - some read the Answers reading again a. false b. true - read in silence to c. true d. true C. Practice (10’) master the contents e. false f. false then answer True B2. Complete the sentences -Close their books or False Keys: a. city and listen twice. - work in group of b. restaurant/bookstore/ temple five. Close their c. hospital -Some guess the books and practice d. house/store answer they hear. saying the e. factory. sentences in part B3. Listen -Open their books B.2 with their museum stadium temple and listen more partner restaurant store bookstore twice. - read the Some read and some park river Lake sentences loudly. write the words they house street - read the words in hotel hear on the board. part B3 carefully. D. Production (5’) Keys: a.temple b.store - Ask ss to worrk in c.river d.hotel groups to do the practice - Check and give feedback Answer the questions. Hospital Factory yard tree.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span> 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Miêu tả thị trấn và giới từ chỉ vị trí 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới và thực hành lại các câu hỏi - Đọc và dịch lại bài khóa B1 - Làm BT 1-2/P 62- 63. Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 6 : C 1-2 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM GIỜ DẠY. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ........ Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2013 Ngày soạn: The 34th period Unit 6: PLACES Lesson 4: C – Around the house (1-2) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể sử dụng các giới từ chỉ vị trí: in front of, behind, to the left/right of để nói vị trí cảnh quan quanh nhà của mình 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu cảnh quan xung quanh ngôi nhà mình 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc và dịch B1 HS 3: Làm BT 1/P 62 ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities. Students/ activities. contents.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span> A. Warm – up:(3’) Game: Slap the board. B. Presentation : (10’) - use pictures to elitcit and ask Ss to give vocab - lead them to practice vocab - get them to copy down - T corrects Ss’ pronunciation - Check voacb : Board drill T draw a house with a tree +Next to the house +Near the house - use the picture to elitcit the text +What’s this ? +Where is the well ? - lead them to read the text - give model sentences C. Practice : (10’) - run through the picture and lead them to ask and answer - model the first sentence : - get them to work in pairs - call on some pairs to show before the class - correct D.Production : (5’) - ask Ss to listen and find the right pictures - run through the pictures - ask Ss to work individually ,compare with their parteners - play the tape twice or. Ss work in groups to play the game Museum, restaurant, hospital, neighborhood, stadium Ss listen to newwords in chorus and individually. - look at the picture and answer - repeat in choral ,in pairs. C1. Listen and read 1.Vocabulary : -in front of : phía trước -behind : phía sau -to the left : phía bên trái -to the right : bên phải 2. Eg: S1: where is the tree? S2:It’s next to the house. A:where is the yard ? - SS listen B:It’s in front of the house - work in pairs to ask A: where are the tall trees ? and answer B: They are behind the mountains *Answer: a.It’s in front of the house b.They are behind the house c.They are behind the tall trees d.It’s in to the left of the house e.They are to the right of the -Ss listen and house compare with others, f.It’s behind the yard then give their C2.Listen and choose the right answer picture Keys: a. which is Ba’s house ? picture a b. which is Lan’s house ?picture b c. which is Tuan’s house?picture a *Write: a. This is Ba’s house. There are a lot of flowers in front of the house b. This is Lan’s house. There are tall trees to the right of the house c. This is Tuan’s house. There are some flowers to the right of the house.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span> three times - get them to listen and give the keys - correct 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Miêu tả xung quanh nhà sử dụng giới từ 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới và thực hành lại các câu hỏi - Đọc và dịch lại bài khóa C1 - Làm BT 1-2/P 63-64. Chuẩn bị bài mới: C 3-4 B. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ........ Ngày soạn: The 35th period Unit 6: PLACES Lesson 5: C – Around the house (3-4) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể sử dụng các giới từ chỉ vị trí và các câu hỏi Where is…./Where are….để miêu tả 1 con đường và vị trí các địa danh trên đường 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu cảnh quan đường phố 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc và dịch C1 ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(28)’.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span> Teacher/ s activities A.Warm up (3’) Ss: play the game “jumbled words” B.Presentation (10’) - Ask Ss to listen to the tape part C3 twice and the repeat sentence by sentence. - T picks up new words from the reading. -T explains the new words and write them on the board. -checks Ss’pronunciation - Check: R.O.R C. Practice (10’) -T explains the model - Ask ss to work in pairs -Asks Ss to write a place in the picture on page 70 on a piece of paper. - Asks Ss to make Yes/ No – questions to guess the place in the paper & change the role. - Comments the game. D. Production: (5’) - T repeats some language to prepare for the written test 2. Students/ activities Cues: Biehnd lewl nomutnai hgrit -> behind; well; mountain; right. contents. C3. Listen and read *.New words - photocopy store(n): tiệm photocopy Ss repeat the words - bakery (n) : tiệm bánh mì after the teacher. -movie theater (n):rạp chiếu phim (choral and - Between (prep) : ở giữa individuals) - Drugstore (n) : hiệu thuốc tây - Opposite (prep) : đối diện Ss listen to the tape - Police station (n) : đồn công an and repeat the - Toy store (n) : cửa hàng đồ chơi sentences some - Children (n) : trẻ em times C4. Ask and answer Ss some read the - Where is the bakery / sentences again restaurant / bookstore……? Ss read in silence - It’s opposite the…….. to master the - It’s between the……and……… contents. - It’s next to the………. Ss work in pair, *Practice: ask and answer the S1:It’s opposite the movie theater. questions, basing on What is it? the picture S2: It’s the police station. Ss work in pair, ask S1: Yes. That right. and answer * Statements: questions as model 1./ It’s opposite the bakery. 2./ it’s between the bakery & the drugstore. -Ss listen and take 3./ It’s next to the bakery. note 4./ It’s opposite the bookstore. 5./ It’s next to the movie theater.. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Miêu tả các địa danh sử dụng các giới từ 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span> - Học thuộc từ mới và thực hành lại các câu hỏi - Làm các bài tập và các kiến thức đã học từ Unit 1 - 6 - Chuẩn bị bài kiểm tra Written test 2 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ......... Ngày soạn: The 36th period WRITTEN TEST 2 I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài kiểm tra, học sinh có thể xem lại các kiến thức đã học từ đầu năm, khả năng học tập của mình đến đâu, giúp giáo viên có thể xác định được phương pháp dạy học đúng đắn cho từng đối tượng học sinh. 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ học tập bộ môn tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP:. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (1’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra 3.Bài mới:(40)’ A. Ma trận (trang bên) B. Questions: I . LISTEN. Listen to the teacher . Then complete the table: ( 2 ms ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span> 1 2 3 4. Action Get up Go to work Work starts Work finishes. Time. Tapescript Nam’s father is a worker . He gets up at 5 o’clock . He has breakfast and goes to work at 6.20 . Work starts at 7.00 and finishes at 4.15 . II . LANGUAGE FOCUS * Choose the best option to complete the following sentences : ( 2,5ms ) 1. ……………. grade are you in ?  I’m in grade 6 . A . which B . what C . where D . when 2. He …………………TV every night . A . watchs B . watch C . watches D. watching 3. ………………..students are there in your class ?  There are forty . A . How B . what C . How many D . when 4. ……………….do you have English ?  I have it on Monday and Saturday . A . when B . what C . where D . which 5. My father goes to work ……………….6.30a.m . A . at B . in C . on D . to 6. Lan’s mother is a teacher . She works in the ………………………. A . school B . factory C . museum D. stadium 7. Where is your classroom ?  It is ………………..the first floor . A . at B . in C . to D . on 8. Nga ……………….breakfast at 6 o’clock every day . A . have B . haves C . has D . hases 9. Minh and Nam ………………….music late in the evening . A . listen B . listens C . listen to D . listens to 10 . ……………………do you go to school ?  At 6.30a.m . A . what B . what time C . which D . where * Each sentence has a mistake . Find and correct it : ( 1,5 ms ) 1. There is a big yard in front the house . 2. Tuan goes to bed on 10 o’clock every evening . 3. He brush his teeth every day . III . READ. Read the following passage and answer the questions : ( 2 ms ) Minh and Tuan are students at Nguyen Hue School in Ho Chi Minh City . They go to a big school . Minh is in grade Six and Tuan is in grade Seven . Minh’s father works in a factory , and Tuan’s mother works in a hospital . Minh and Tuan play soccer after school ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span> 1. 2. 3. 4. IV .. Which school do Minh and Tuan go to ? Is their school big? Which grade is Minh in ? Where does Tuan’s mother work ? WRITE. Write 4 sentences to talk about your house : (2ms ) Ex: There is a hospital to the left of my house..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span> Tên chủ đề. Nhận biết TNKQ. Listening. TL. Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: 2 Số điểm: 1. Grammar Vocabulary. Multipcle Choice. Mistake correction. Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: 5 Số điểm: 1.25. Số câu:1 Số điểm:0.5. Số câu: Số điểm: Writing Số câu: Số điểm: Tổng số câu: Tổng số điểm: Tỉ lệ %. TNKQ. Gap fill. Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu:1 Số điểm:0,5. TL. Cấp độ thấp TNKQ TL. Gap fill Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: Số điểm:. WHquestion. Reading. Vận dụng. Thông hiểu. Số câu: 1 Số điểm: 0.5. Số câu: Số điểm:. Mistake correction. Multipcle Choice. Số câu:1 Số điểm:0.5. Số câu: 5 Số điểm: 1.25. Số câu:1 Số điểm:0,5. Rewrite (word cues). Rewrite (word cues). Số câu: Số câu: 1 Số điểm: Số điểm: 0,5 Số câu: 10 Số điểm: 3.75 37.5%. Số câu: Số câu: 1 Số điểm: Số điểm: 0,5 Số câu: 4 Số điểm: 2.0 20.0 %. Cộng. Gap fill. WHquestion Số câu: Số điểm:. Cấp độ cao TNKQ TL. Số câu: 1 Số điểm: 0.5. Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: 4 Số điểm: 2.0. Mistake correction Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: Số điểm:. WHquestion Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: 1 Số điểm: 0.5. Số câu:1 Số điểm:0.5. Số câu: 13 Số điểm: 4.0. WHquestion Số câu: Số điểm:. Số câu: 1 Số điểm: 0.5. Rewrite (word cues). Rewrite (word cues). Số câu: 1 Số câu: Số điểm: 0.5 Số điểm: Số câu: 11 Số điểm: 4.25 42.5 %. Số câu: 1 Số điểm: 0.5. 4. Củng cố: (1’) - GV thu bài, nhắc nhở và nhận xét thái độ làm bài của học sinh 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 2’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Xem lại các cấu trúc ngữ pháp. Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 7: A 1-2 V.RÚT KINH NGHIỆM:. Số câu: 4 Số điểm: 2.0. Số câu: 4 Số điểm: 2.0 Số câu: 25 Số điểm: 10 100%.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span> ..................................................................................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span> Ngày soạn: The 37th period Unit 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 1: A – Is your house big? (1,3,5) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng đọc hiểu 1 đoạn hội thoại và 1 lá thư về 1 ngôi nhà. Thực hành trả lời câu hỏi và rèn luyện kỹ năng miêu tả 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu và chăm sóc ngôi nhà của mình 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (8’) Answer the teacher’s questions ………………………………………………………………………………… 3.Bài mới:(30)’ Teacher/ s activities A.Warm – up(2’) Free talking:. Students/ activities Where is your house? Is it near a river? ………….. B. Presentation(20’) *Pre - listening: - T sets the scene: They are Minh and Hoa. Minh is asking about Hoa’s House. Before listening, I have a grid with some information. Predict and stick You should stick in colums “ Yes” if it is right, and stick in column “ No” if it is wrong by predicting. listen to the tape then check their predictions. - T collects Ss’s ideas *While - Listening: - T have Ss check their predictions.. contents I.Listen. 1.Listen and complete the table Yes No ………big? v ………small? v ………a well? v ………a yard? v ……….flowers? v ………..trees? v. 2.Use the grid to talk about Hoa’s house - Example statements..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span> - After each student’ answer. T plays the tape again to check. * Post – listening -T asks Ss to use the grid to talk about Hoa’s house. read the vocabulary Reading (A2) chorally, then *Pre - reading: Vocab. individually. - T uses pictures on page 73 to teach vocabulary. *Checking Vocab : R.O.R * T/F prediction + T sets the scene: You are going to read Nga’s letter which she writes to Lan. In the letter she writes about her house. Before reading the letter, you read the statements and tell me which sentence is true, - S read and predict T or F. T false - A - Ask a student to read allgets Ss’ predictions. statements first. *While - reading. Ask ss to do groupwork C. Production(6’) - read the letter on page * Post – reading 73 then check their Check ss’ answer predictions. Hoa’s house is small. It is not big. There is a yard. There are flowers. There isn’t awell.There aren’t trees. II. Reading (A2) 1. Vocabulary. - a garden: (n) vên - a vegetable: (n) rau qu¶ ( explanation) - a photo : bøc ¶nh ( realia) 2. Reading *. True or false statements. a. The house is in the country b. There is a river near the house. c. There are trees to the left of the house. d. There are two gardens. * Keys. a. T b. F c. F d. T * Answer key: a.D, b.A, c.E, d.B, e.C Example Exchange S1: Is there a flower garden in front of the house? S2: Yes, there is.. -do matching (one by one) - Group work : ask and answer the question (A2: a e) 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài: Miêu tả ngôi nhà của mình 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới và thực hành lại các câu hỏi - Làm các bài tập 1,2 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 7: A 3-5 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: The 38th period Unit 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 2: B – Town or country? (1).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span> I.MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng đọc hiểu bài khóa về Ba và Chi và về nơi họ đang sống. Thực hành với dạng câu hỏi Yes/No 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thiên nhiên, cảnh đẹp quê hương nơi mình sống 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (8’) HS 1-2: Đọc đoạn hội thoại và trả lời 1 số câu hỏi HS 3: Làm BT 1 ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3.Bài mới:(30)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:(5’) - Jumbled words: B. Pre – reading(7’) + Pre - teach: Vocab T uses some techniques for eliciting : chorally/ individually * Checking Vocab : R.O.R +T sets the scene: You are going to read the texts about Ba’s apartment and Chi’s house. Before reading the texts, I want you to read the passage about Ba and Chi and fill in the gaps with suitable words ( using the pictures) C.While- reading(10’) - T. has students correct the false words. Students/ activities Ouncryt = country ; wont = town …………………… Ss read the Vocab. - Ss look at the pictures and fill in the gaps. Ss “ look at the pictures and fill in the gaps  T. collects students’s ideas. - Ss read the text on page (76/77) and read the text silently. Then check their. contents B1. Listen and read. Then choose the correct answer Vocabulary. - noisy (a) >< quiet (a): ån µo >< yªn tÜnh. - an apartment (n): c¨n hé. - a zoo (n): vên b¸ch thó. - paddy fields= rice paddy: *Reading. 1. Fill in the gaps with suitable words. (Using the pictures.) Nam lives in an (1) ………… in town. Near his apartment, there is a supermarket, a post-office, ( 2)………,a clinic, a market and a (3)…… . It is.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span> - Ask 2 Ss to read the texts predictions above. aloud. * Answer the questions:B1/ P.76 1. Does Ba live in town? ( Yes, he is) 2. Does he live in a house? - Play lucky number ( No, he doesn’t) 3. Is the country noisy? ( No, it isn’t) 4. LK 5. LK 6. Does Chi live in town? 9 No, she doesn’t) 7. Are there any flowers? ( Yes, there are) 9. LK 10. Is the country quiet? ( Yes, it is) D.Post- reading(8’) Read the text aloud and translate. very (4)………here Chi lives in a (5)…………in the country . There aren’t any stores here. There are not any (6)…here.There are trees and (7)…….., a river , a lake and ( 8)……. It is very (9)…………in the country. Keys 1. apartment 4. noisy 2. a bank 5. house 3. zoo 6. stores 7. flowers. 8.quiet 2.Answer the questions - Play a game: Lucky Number Cat- Mouse 1 6. 2 7. 3 8. 4 9. 5 10. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới . Đọc và dịch bài khóa - Làm các bài tập 1,2,3/P 68-69 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 7: B2-3 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: The 39th period Unit 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 3: B – Town or country? (2, 3) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span> 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng thực hành thêm về bài khóa về nhà ở của Chi và Ba. Luyện kỹ năng nghe hiểu thông tin 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thiên nhiên, cảnh đẹp quê hương nơi mình sống 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc bài khóa và trả lời câu hỏi HS 3: Làm BT 2/P 68 ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up: Free talking:. Students/ activities contents Do you live in town? Are there any stores near your house? B. Presentation: ……………………………. B2. Read about Ba. Then write sentences Have students read the text Answers: about Ba again. Chi lives in a house in the - Ask students to read the - Read the text country. Near her house, text about Chi and write there aren’t any stores. It is sentences about Chi’s very quiet. house. - Call students to read the - Write sentences about Chi sentences. then read B3: Grid: - Listen and correct. Listen - Give the corrections. Answers: - Have the students read Name Ci. T. C. Apart. the table. House. - Listen and check to - Read the table Minh v x v x complete the table. Tuan x v x v - Listen and correct. Nga v x v - Give the corrections. *Model sentences: - Ask students the Do you live in town? questions: Where do you - Work in pairs to ask and No. I live in the country. live?/ Do you live in town? answer Does he live in town? - Have Ss listen and repeat. No. He lives in the country. - Give the model..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span> - Run through all these cues. - Model the first cue. - Have students practice the next cues. - Fix the poster on the board. - Have Ss look at the poster, ask and answer the questions then complete - Work in groupd to the table. practice with the cue C. Practice ( Teacher models first )Pair work: talk about places they live (open pairs/ close pairs) Eg: S1: “ Hello, I’m Lan. I live in apartment in Hanoi It is very noisy. Near my house, there are…………” D. Production. T give remark. Practice: Word Cue Drill 1. town/ country 2. house/ apartment 3. lake/ river 4. hospital/ factory 5. bank/ post office 6. supermaket / market 7. shops/ paddy fields 8. zoo/ museum Example Exchanges: S1: Do you live in town? S2: No. I live in the country. S1: Do you live near a lake? S2: No. I live near a river. Eg: S1: “ Hello, I’m Lan. I live in apartment in Hanoi It is very noisy. Near my house, there are…………”. - Do pairwork 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại kiến thức chính của bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm các bài tập 4,5/P69-70 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Test correction V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2013 Ngày soạn: The 40th period TEST CORRECTION I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng biết kiến thức mình học như thế nào, những lỗi hay mắc phải và cách sửa chữa, giúp GV đánh giá được năng lực của từng học sinh và phương pháp giảng dạy của mình 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ học tập tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span> Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Làm BT 4/P 69 HS 2: Làm BT 5/P 70 ……………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(28)’ A. GV nhận xét thái độ làm bài của học sinh, nhắc những lỗi HS hay mắc phải (7’) - Bài tập lựa chọn đáp án còn sai nhiều - Kỹ năng nghe tốt, hầu hết các học sinh điền được gần hết bài nghe - Bài tập tìm lỗi sai học sinh làm còn kém - Kỹ năng trả lời câu hỏi tốt. - Bài viết còn 1 số lỗi nhắc nhở - Khuyến khích ưu điểm và nhắc nhở những nhược điểm của HS B. GV trả bài, chữa lỗi từng bài tập cho HS (23’) Question I: Listening: 2 đ - Mỗi câu trả lời đúng đạt 0,5 đ 1. 5.00. 2. 6.20. 3. 7.00. 4. 4.15. Question II: Grammar * Choose the best answer: 2,5 đ: Mỗi đáp án đúng đạt 0,25 đ 1. a. 2. c. 3. c. 4. a. 5. a. 6. a. 7.d. 8. c. 9. c. 10. b. * Find and correct mistake: Mỗi câu trả lời đúng đạt 0, 5 đ 1. in front = in front of;. 2. on = at. 3. brush = brushes.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span> Question III. Read. Then answer: 2 đ: Mỗi câu trả lời đúng đạt 0,5 đ 1. Minh and Tuan are students at Nguyen Hue school 2. Yes. It is 3. Minh is in grade 6 4. Tuan’s mother works in a hospital Question IV. Write sentences: 2 đ. Mỗi câu đúng đạt 0,5 đ Possible answer: 1. There are trees behind my house 2. There are flowers to the left of my house 3. There is a well to the right of my house 4. There is a school near my house 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV thu lại bài, nhắc nhở lại kiến thức HS cần chú ý 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Ôn tập lại các kiến thức - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 7: C – 1-2 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: The 41st period Unit 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 4: C – On the move (1) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng thực hành thì hiện tại đơn và các câu hỏi với “How….” Để hỏi về phương tiện đi lại. Học sinh có thể nói về phương tiện chuyển động của mọi người 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ tìm hiểu về các phương tiện đi lại 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span> II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra(8’) Answer the teacher’s questions ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(30)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:(5’) Asks Ss to choose a place in town (factory; museum; post office;…) & complete the sentences strip & play the game in groups. - Corrects & comments. B. Presentation(10’) - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Reads the words for the modal Then helps Ss to read - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss read the text in silence. - Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to practice in groups & in pairs. C.Practice(10’) Introduces the example. Students/ activities Modelsentence:B4 – P77. S1.Do you live near a part ? S2: No, I don’t. S1: Do you live near a bank ? S2: Yes, I do.. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. - Reading the text in silence. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. -Correcting the pronunciation - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs .. contents C1. Listen and read * vocabulary: by bike: bằng xe đạp by bus: b»ng xe buýt by motorbike: b»ng xe m¸y by car: b»ng xe h¬i by train: b»ng tµu thuû by plane: b»ng m¸y bay *Model sentence: How do/ does + S+ go/travel to + nơi đến? - S + go/goes/travel/ travels to + nơi đến + by + phương tiện đi lại * Example exchange: S1:How does [Lien] go to school ? S2: She goes by [bike]. S1: How does [Mr. Nam] travel to work ? S2: He travels by [train]. Mrs Dung Mrs Lan Mr Hai (plane) (bus) (train) Lien Thu Tuan (walk) (bike) (bus) Mr Ba Mr Kim Hoa (motorbike)(plane) (walk) Ex: How does Mrs Dung.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span> travel to work? exchange & Helps Ss to -Correcting the She travels by plane. practice. pronunciation - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat - Do groupwork in chorus & in individual. * 11 pictures cues: - Asks Ss to make sentences Lien; Thu; Tuan; Hoa; for the next. Huong; Mr. Nam; Mrs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation Lan; Mr. Ba; Miss. Hoa; & comments. ; Mr Kim D.Production (5’) Noughts & Crosses: - Introduces the content & Ss to choose the name to helps Ss to practice the game make the question & in two groups. answer. - Asks Ss to choose the name to make the question & answer. - Corrects 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới. Thực hành hỏi và trả lời về phương tiện. Làm BT1,2/P70 - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 7: C – 1-2 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………………... Ngày soạn: The 42nd period Unit 7: YOUR HOUSE Lesson 5: C – On the move (3,4,5) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể luyện kỹ năng nghe hiểu trả lời ngắn và đọc hiểu bài khóa về hoạt động hàng ngày của Hoàng, về những thói quen hàng ngày của mọi người 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ học hỏi về những thói quen tốt 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span> II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2,3: Hỏi và trả lời về các phương tiện đi lại HS 4: Làm BT 1/70 …………………………………………………………………………… 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up: - Ask Ss to take turns to go to the board to do the matching. B. Presentation: *Find someone who... * Open prediction: -Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual to predict what time Hoang does the following things. - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. C. Practice - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text & get the details & check the prediction. - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text. -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to match the questions to the answers.. Students/ activities contents Matching Bike Tµu háa 1.Listen. Motorbike §i bé Find someone who... Plane Xe đạp Train Xe m¸y Name: Bus §i l¹i Find someone who....... Car ¤t« ......gets up at six. Walk M¸y bay Travel Xe buýt .....walks to school. ....goes to school by bus. ....goes to school by - listen. bike. ........etc.... Use Example exchanges Eg: +Do you get up at six? to ask and answer. -Yes, I do / No, I don’t. - Working in individual to predict what time 2. Read Hoang does the What following things. time? - Comparing & giving He gets up 5.30 their prediction. 6.30 - Reading the text & He leaves the getting the details & house School starts 7.00 checking the prediction 11.30 - Giving the main idea School ends He has lunch 12.00 of the letter..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span> - Helps Ss to correct * Questions: a. What time does Hoang get up ? b. What time does he go to school ? c. Does he go to school by car ? d.Does he walk to school ? e. What time do classes start ? f. What time do they end ? D. Production: Survey:. -Working in pairs to * Answers: match the questions to a. Hoang gets up at 5.30. the answers. b. He goes to school at 6.30. c. No, he doesn’t. - Giving the answer d. Yes, he does. keys. e. Classes start at 7.00. f. They end at 11.30 - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới. Đọc và dịch bài khóa, trả lời câu hỏi - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 8: A- 1-2 - Làm BT 3,4/P 71 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2013. Ngày soạn: The 43rd period Unit 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 1: A – What are you doing? (1-2) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể làm quen và thực hành với thì hiện tại tiếp diễn để nói về những hoạt động đang diễn ra tại thời điểm hiện tại.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span> 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thích những hoạt động hàng ngày 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT V.TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết. Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc bài khóa và trả lời câu hỏi HS 3: Làm BT 3/71 ………………………………………………………………………………. 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up: - Hang man: B. Presentation - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss read the text in. Students/ activities contents -Play game as T’s dirrect Do, play A1. Listen and read. - Listening to the words. *Vocabulary: (to) play video games: chơi - Repeating the words in trò chơi chorus & in individual. (to) ride a bike: đạp xe Correcting the mistakes. (to) drive: lái xe (to) wait for: chờ đợi - Copying the words. *Model sentence: I’m [am] playing games - Reading the text in He/ She’s[is]riding a bike. silence. *Present progressive.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span> silence. - Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to practice in groups & in individual. - Introduces the form & use of the grammar. C. Practice: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. -Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. -Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . D. Production -Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 4. Củng cố: (2’). +I/ He/She+am/is/are +V-ing. - Practicing in groups & + Use: Talk about happening in individual. actions -Correcting the A2. Ask and answer: pronunciation. *Model sentence: - What‘s (is) he / she doing ? are you / they He/she ‘s (is) studying. - Practice in pairs I ’m (am) *Form: What + am/is/are+S+ V-ing? Use: Asking about actions happening * Example exchange: What are you doing? a) I’m [walking to school ]. b) He’s / She’s [waiting for a bus].. - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc từ mới. Trả lời câu hỏi - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 8: A- 13,4 - Làm BT 1,2/P 72,73 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: The 44th period Unit 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 2: A – What are you doing? (3-4) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể thực hành hỏi và trả lời với thì hiện tại tiếp diễn, rèn luyện kỹ năng nghe hiểu chọn thông tin đúng 2.Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thích những hoạt động thường ngày 3.Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span> 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2-3: Hỏi và trả lời với thì HTTD HS 4: Làm BT 1/72 …………………………………………………………………………………. 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:. Students/ activities Wordsquare:. Game: Wordsquare Watch, wait, drive, travel, go, ride,. W U P D O X A K L A W T T R A V E L C I Y G O G H D R I V E Q E W A I T. B. Presentation: - Work in groups -Ask Ss to do the exercises in A3 and write the answers in their notebooks. - Call Ss to read the - Give the answer answers before the class. - Remind the present progressive tense again. - Retell about the Noughts & Crosses: progressive tense - Introduces the content & helps Ss to practice the game in two groups. - Asks Ss to choose the name. to. make. question & answer.. contents. - Do groupwork to the choose the best answers. A3. Answer: Answer and write the answers in your notebook: Ex: What are you doing? I’m writing.. Wait. Drive. Travel by. for a. a bus. bus. train Walk to Ride a. Play a. school Go by. bike Drive. game Ride a. plane. a car. motorbike.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span> - Corrects & Comments the game. -Ask SS to talk about each picture - listen and number the - Talk about the picture as they hear. picture - Have Ss give the answers. - Listen and correct. - Ask SS to write the sentences that you hear. T monitor & correct. A4. Listen Answer key: 1-b, 2-f, 3-d, 4-a, 5-c, 6-e.. Listen and write what you hear 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc cấu trúc. Thực hành hỏi và trả lời các câu hỏi - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 8: B – 1,2 - Làm BT 3,4/P 73 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: The 45th period Unit 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 3: B – A truck driver ( 1,2) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể đọc hiểu bài khóa tranh nói về công việc hàng ngày của 1 người lái xe tải 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ yêu thích và học tập lao động 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV.TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A. Sĩ số. HS vắng.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span> 6B 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Làm Bt 3/P 73 HS 2: Làm BT 4/73 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:(3’) Free talking B. Presentation:(10’) -Elicit to teach vocabulary. -Control students to practice vocabulary. - Check vocabulary by matching - Who is this? - Yes. This is Mr Quang. He is a truck driver. In order to know what he does and where he goes. We come to B1.. Students/ activities 1.What do your parents do? 2.Do you help them?.......... contents B1. Listen and read 1.Vocabulary: a truck driver: ngêi l¸i xe t¶i a farmer : ngêi n«ng d©n (to) load: chÊt hµng lªn (to) unload: dì hµng xuèng a food stall: quÇy b¸n thùc - Guess the new words phÈm (to) arrive at: đến 2.Odering statements: 1. going to Hanoi 2. meeting the farmer - Practice with the 3. having breakfast new words 4. going to a farm 5. loading vegetables 6. unloading the truck - These are the activities which Mr Quang does but - Do the matching in 3.Answer key: groups they are not in the correct a.4, b.2, c.5, d.1, e.6, f.3 order. You read and guess 4.Comprehension Questions: to order. a. Mr Quang is a truck driver. - Have S listen to the tape.( b. He is going to a farm. close your book) c. A farmer is waiting for him. - Open your book, read and d. He is taking the vegetables to check. - Ordering the the market. - Listen and correct. statetments in groups e. He is eating his breakfast. - Control Ss to ask and f. He is eating at a foodstall. answer the questions by B2.Read the dialouge lucky number. 1.Answer the question - Give the answer a. Ba is doing his homework C. Practice(10’) b. Yes, he is c. No, he isn’t - Introduce the dialogue d. He is playing soccer between - Play game e. No, they aren’t Lan and Ba. Lan is asking * Câu hỏi có phải ai đó đang Ba about what Ba, Tuan, Nga and Huong are doing. làm gì không? - Have Ss listen to the tape. - Are you doing math? -work in group talk ( three times ) - Yes, I am. / No, I’m not. about Mr Quang again - Is he playing soccer? - Call Ss to read the dialogue again. - Yes, he is. / No, he isn’t. * The nghi van cua thi hien D. Production(5’) tai tiep dien Ask ss to ask and anser Be + S + Ving + N ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span> Yes, S + be./No , S + be not.. with yes/ no question in the presentprogressive tense. - Listen to the tape then read the dialogue - Ask and anser in pair. 4. Củng cố: GV nhắc lại nội dung chính của bài học 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: Học thuộc lòng từ mới. Đọc và dịch bài khóa - Làm BT 1,3/P 73,74. Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 8: C – 1,2 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... …………………………………………………………………………………………. Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2013 Ngày soạn: The 46th period : Unit 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 4: C – Road signs ( 1,2) I.MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể biết và sử dụng “can, can’t” để nói về biển báo đường. Biết về từ mới giao thông. 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ nghiêm chỉnh chấp hành luật giao thông 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Đọc và dịch bài khóa. Sĩ số. HS vắng.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span> HS 3: Làm Bt 3/P 74 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities Students/ activities A.Warm – up: (3’) Chatting Chatting Talk about the ways you trave on the road B . Presentation(10’) -Introduce some vocabulary -Elicit to teach vocabulary. -Control students to practice vocabulary. -Check vocabulary by rub out and remember. -We come to: Listen and read. - Introduce some road signs. - Have Ss look at some road signs and guess what these signs are, using can/ can’t. - Have Ss listen to the tape. - Open the book, read and check. - Give the questions, ask Ss read the questions, read the passages again and think the answers. - Listen and correct. -Give the corrections. -Give the model sentences. C. Practice(10’) - Have Ss look at 4 signs in C2 and complete the sentences, using can or can’t. - Listen and correct. - Give the corrections. - Have Ss practice in pairs, ask and answer: - Fix some road signs on the board. D. Production(5’) - Ask Ss to make the sentences, using: can or can’t.. - guess the meaning and practice with the new words. - Guess about the road signs. contents C1. Listen and read: 1.Vocabulary: -road sign (n): biÓn b¸o giao th«ng - park (v): đỗ xe - turn (v) : rÏ - ahead (adv) : vÒ phÝa tríc - job(n) : nghÒ nghiÖp - difficult (adj) : khã kh¨n - policeman (n) : c«ng an - go into : ®i vµo - way (n) : con đờng - one way : đờng một chiều - say (v) : nãi - something (pro) : mét c¸i g× 2.Comprehension Questions: 1. What does Hoan do? 2. Is his job difficult? Tell me why ( in Vietnamese ) 3. What does this sign mean? 4. What does this sign mean? *Model sentences: You can park here. You can’t go into that street. S + can/ can’t + V(nt). - Listen to the tape to check the guessing. - Read the book and correct the guessing - Note about the modals: Can/ can’t. => dùng để diễn đạt sự cho phép hay không cho phép II. Practice: *Answers: a. You can turn left. b. You can’t turn right. c. You can go ahead. d. You can’t ride a motorbike. III. Further Practice: *Answers: + You can turn right. + You can’t turn left. + You can’t ride a bike. + You can’t park here. ….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span> - Call some Ss to go to the board and do.. - Practice with the signs in pairs S1: What does the sign say? S2: It says “ you can turn left”.. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài: can’t or can S + can + V … / S + can’t + V … 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới - Đọc và nói về các biển báo với can và can’t - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 8: C – 3,4 - Làm BT 1,2/P 75 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... …………………………………………………………………………………………. Ngày soạn: The 47th period Unit 8: OUT AND ABOUT Lesson 5: C – Road signs ( 3,4,5) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể đọc hiểu bài khóa về biển báo đường để thực hành với must/mustn’t cho sự bắt buộc hoặc nghĩa vụ. 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ nghiêm chỉnh chấp hành luật giao thông 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT, băng, đài 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT V. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ Ngày tháng Lớp Sĩ số 6A 6B 2. Kiểm tra (10’) HS 1: Viết từ mới HS 2: Làm BT 1/P 75 HS 3: Làm BT 2/P 75. HS vắng.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span> ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities A. Warm – up:(3’) Use the picture: Where is it? Yes, How we should go at the intersection. Today we come to part C3-4. B. Presentaion:(10’) -Inoduce some vocabulary -Elicit to teach vocabulary. -Control students to practice vocabulary. - Check vocabulary by rub out and remember. - Have Ss look at three road signs in the book ( page 90 ) and ask: - Do you know these road signs? - Have Ss guess the meaning of these road signs. - Have Ss read the text and find the name of these road signs. - Ask Ss: What should you do when you see these road signs? - Listen and correct. - Give the corrections. - Have Ss notice how to use and the meaning of must and mustn’t. - Call Ss to read the text. C. Practice(10’) Have Ss look at the pictures in C4 and choose the correct statement for each one. - Have Ss listen to the tape. - Have Ss listen to the tape again and give which road sign is first/ second/ third … D. Production(5’) - Listen and correct. - Give the corrections.. Students/ activities. contents C3. Listen and read 1.Vocabulary: road (n) : con đờng - Guess and give the dangerous (adj): nguy hiÓm accident (n) : tai n¹n answers discipline (n ): help(v) : giúp đỡ warn(v) : c¶nh b¸o fast(adv) nhanh ><slow (v) : dõng l¹i - Guess the new words stop slow down (v) : giảm tốc độ _ and practice with them intersection (n): giao lé C4.Listen * Answer - Guess about the road a. Slow down V Go straight signs b. Turn left V Don’t turn left c. Turn right Go straight or turn left V d. Slow down - Work in groups to Don’t go straight ahead V answer the questions e. Park here Don’t park here V f. Cars and trucks go here V Motorbike go here g. Don’t go straight Don’t turn right or left V h. Park here V Don’t park here. C5. Practice 1-c: You can’t turn right here. 2-d: There’s a stop sign. I must - Note about Must/ stop. 3-h: You can’t park your car mustn’t here. 4-a: You must slow down. There’s an intersection ahead. 5-g: You can enter that road. Look at the sign. 6-b: We can turn left here. - Do practice in 7-f: You can’t ride motorbike groups on this street. + Remember: S + must + V … S + mustn’t + V ….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span> 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài: must or mustn’t 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Học thuộc lòng từ mới - Đọc và nói về các biển báo với can và can’t, must và mustn’t - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Grammar practice - Làm BT 3,4/P 76 V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ……………………………………………………………………………………… Ngày soạn: The 48th period GRAMMAR PRACTICE I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể ôn tập và thực hành làm bài tập so sánh giữa thì hiện tại tiếp diễn và thì hiện tại đơn. Sử dụng các kiến thức ngữ pháp 1 cách hoàn chỉnh 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ và ý thức học tập các kiến thức ngữ pháp tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II.PHƯƠNG PHÁP. - Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ 1. Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT 2. Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra 3. Bài mới:(38)’ Teacher/ s activities Activity 1: The simple present. - T asks Ss to repeat some verbs of talk about means of travelling. _ Notice +Use? + adverbs? - Ask Ss to do Ex1/p92.. Students/ activities - Retell about the present simple tense Note: “go, travel,walk and question word How”. the use of the tense: to express an everyday action. - work pairs to do.. contents 1.Present simple tense. + Form: S + V(s/es). + Use: to express an everyday action. + Adverbs: always/ usually/ often/sometime/ never… every day/week/month/year. + Answer key: a, How do you go? -I go to school by bus.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span> - Give feedback-> check. Activity 2: The Present progressive tense. - Review of formation: I am/ You, We, They are…., He/ She/ It is………+ Ving.. b, How does he travel to Hanoi? - He travels by plane. - Retell about the 2.The Present progressive present progressive tense. + Form: tense The Use : To express an I + am + action happening at the You/ They/ We + are + Ving same time or around the He/ She / It + is + time or around the time + Answer key: a, Minh is riding his bike. as we are talking. b, They are waiting for a bus. 3.Preposition. c, She is watching television. - Have Ss look at the d. We are playing soccer. picture and ask the e, He is listening to music. question like this: “ f, They are walking to school. What do you see in the g, He is travelling to Ha noi. picture?/ What is the 3. Preposition: Look at the picture girl doing?/ and the *Complete the exercise with the guess and give the anser words in the box. boy? - Ask Ss to read the list Is/ in front of/ behind/ opposite/ of words and give the to the left of/ to the right of. meanings. 4.Question words. 4.Question words: 1. Wh- words: - Ask Ss to repeat some Where : Who : What: the use of the tense: to questions words and How : How old express an everyday their uses they’ve When : What time action. learnt. How many How much - Ss repeat: Where/ Exercise 4/p93: Who/ What/ How/ How + Answer key: old/ When/ What a, Where, b, Who, c, What, d, time……. What - Then asks Ss to do Exercise 5/P95. exercise 4/p93. + Answer key: -Ss work in pairs to do. do exercise 4/p93. in A, play/ playing - Give feed back/ B, rides/ is riding pairs correct. C, go/ are going + Exercise 5/P. 94. D, drive/ is driving. Ss work in pairs to do. - Give feed back/ correct. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Học các kiến thức ngữ pháp - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Revision V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... Ký duyệt của tổ chuyên môn Ngày….tháng…… năm 2013.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span> Ngày soạn: The 49th period REVISION I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể ôn tập và thực hành làm bài tập với các kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ và ý thức học tập các kiến thức ngữ pháp tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra 3. Bài mới (38’) I.The present simple tense: * With “ To be”: I am ( I’m ) He ( He’s ) She is ( She’s ) It ( It’s ) You ( You’re ) We are ( We’re ) They ( They’re ) Ex: 1. ( + ) I am a student. 3.( + ) You are engineers. ( - ) I am not a student. ( - ) You aren’t engineers. ( ? ) Am I a student? ( ? ) Are you engineers? 2. ( + ) She is a teacher. 4.( + ) They are doctors. ( - ) She isn’t a teacher. ( - ) They aren’t doctors. ( ? ) Is she a teacher? ( ? ) Are they doctors? * With ordinary verb: S + V(ht) I/ We / You / They + V He / She / It + Vs/es Note: Thêm ES vào sau các động từ tận cùng là: X, S, O, CH, SH, Z. Ex: 1. ( + ) I get up at 6 o’clock. 2. ( + ) She gets up at 5. ( - ) I don’t get up at 6 o’clock. ( - ) She doesn’t get up at 5. ( ? ) Do I get up at 6 o’clock? ( ? ) Does she get up at 5? 3. ( + ) They go to school by bike. 4. ( + ) He goes to school every.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span> afternoon. ( - ) They don’t go to school by bike. ( - ) He doesn’t go to school every afternoon. ( ? ) Do they go to school by bike? ( ? ) Does he go to school every afternoon? II.The present progressive tense: S + is/am/are + V-ing I : am He / She / It : is We / You / They : are Ex: 1.( + ) I am playing soccer. 2. ( + ) He is walking to school. ( - ) I am not playing soccer. ( - ) He isn’t walking to school. ( ? ) Am I playing soccer? ( ? ) Is he walking to school? 3. ( + ) We are traveling to Hanoi. 4. ( + ) They are waiting for a bus. ( - ) We aren’t traveling to HN. ( - ) They aren’t waiting for a bus. ( ? ) Are we traveling to HN? ( ? ) Are they waiting for a bus? Exer 1: Give the correct form of verbs in bracket 1. The swimming bath..................(open) at 9:00 and ..............(close) at 18:30 every day. 2.I have a car but I.................(not-use) it very often. 3.I.......................(play) the piano now, but I...................(not-play) very well. 4.I don’t understand the word”decide”. What.........................(“decide”/ mean)? 5.I ............................(work) in a bank. Nam.........................(work) in an office Keys: 1. opens, closes 2. don’t use 3. am playing, don’t play 4. does “decide” mean 5. work, works Exer 2: Fill in am, is, are 1. He....................a nurse. 2.They ..........................doctors. 3.Peter.....................a student. 4.I........................small but my father..............big. 5.Miss Mai.....................always early. 6. We................ teachers and they ..................workers. Keys: 1. is 2. are 3. is 4. am, is 5. is 6. are, are 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Học các kiến thức ngữ pháp - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Revision V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………………...... Ngày soạn: The 50th period REVISION I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span> 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể ôn tập và thực hành làm bài tập với các kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ và ý thức học tập các kiến thức ngữ pháp tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra 3. Bài mới (38’) I.Possessive pronouns: I my Ex: My name is Lan. You your That is your desk. He his That is his desk. She her That is her desk. We our These are our desks. They their Those are their desks. It Its II.Imperative ( Command ) - Come in. - Open your book. - Sit down - Close your book. - Stand up. III.There is / There are Ex: There is one. There are two. IV.Prepositions: ( in, on, at, near, next to, in front of, behind, between, opposite, to the left of, to the right of, from……to….. ) Ex: There is a house near the lake. The house is in the country. There is a store next to the lake. The house is on a quiet street. There is a car in front of the house. There are mountains behind the house. There are trees to the left of the house. There is a bus opposite the house. V.Answer the questions about you: 1. What’s your name? 2. How do you spell your name? 3. How are you today? 4. How old are you? 5. Where do you live? 6. How many people are there in you family? 7. How many students are there in your class?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span> 8. Which grade are you in? 9. Which class are you in? 10. What do you do? 11. How many floors does your school have? 12. Where is your classroom? 13. What do you do every morning? 14. What time do you get up? 15. What time do you have breakfast? 16. What time do you go to school? 17. What time do you go to bed? 18. What time do classes start? 19. What time do classes end? 20 What do you do after school? 21. When do you have English/ Math/ literature …….. ? 22. What is in front of your house? 23. What is behind your house? 24. What is to the left of your house? 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Học các kiến thức ngữ pháp - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Revision V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………………....... Ngày soạn: The 51st period REVISION I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể ôn tập và thực hành làm bài tập với các kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ và ý thức học tập các kiến thức ngữ pháp tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span> 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra 3. Bài mới (38’) Câu I:Khoanh tròn câu trả lời đúng nhất 1. Suong …............a student A. am B. is C. are 2. He …… his homework. A. do B. did C. does 3. They are ……… English now . A. studying B.study C. studies 4. We ……..to school every morning. A. go B. goes C. going 5. Lan …… breakfast at 6.30 . A. have B. has C. having 6. He goes to school ………..bicycle. A. by B. with C. on 7. There is a big tree ………….your school . A. near B. in front of C. to the left 8. He is ……soccer at the momemt . A. play B. plays C. playing 9. Lan and Nam …………... ten years old. A. am B.is C.are 10. That is my mother. ………… is thirty-nine years old. A.He B. She C. It Câu II: Điền sang thể phủ định và nghi vấn. 1. They live in an apartment. 2. He is playing scoccer. Câu III.Nối cột A với cột B cho thích hợp : A B 1. How old are you ? a. I’m in grade six 2. What are you doing ? b.She does her homework 3. Which grade are you in ? c. I’m eleven years old 4. What does she do after school ? d.I’m learning English Câu IV: Cho dang đúng động từ trong ngoặc. 1. Hoa (get) up at 5.45 2. I ( brush ) my teeth at the moment. 3. My mother (have ) breakfast now. 4. He (go ) to school at six o’clock Câu IV: Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi: There are four people in Lan’s family. Her father is a teacher. He likes playing soccer and reading newspaper. Her mother is a doctor. She is very beautiful, she works in the hospital. Her brother is an enginer. He can swim, play soccer and tennis well. Lan is a student . She is eleven years old. She goes to school by bike.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span>  Questions: 1. What does Lan’s father do ? 2. Where does her mother do ? 3. How old is Lan ? 4. How many people are they in Lan’s family ? 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Học các kiến thức ngữ pháp - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Revision V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………………....... Ngày soạn: The 52nd period REVISION I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1.Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh có thể ôn tập và thực hành làm bài tập với các kiến thức ngữ pháp đã học 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ và ý thức học tập các kiến thức ngữ pháp tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span> 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra 3. Bài mới (38’) I. Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn chỉnh các câu sau (A , B, C hoặc D ). 1) Nam and Lan are students . ………………….are in class 6.A. A. He B. She C. They D. You 2) She ………………..go to school on Sundays. A. doesn’t B. don’t C. isn’t D. aren’t 3) How many …………………….are there in the box? A. pencil B. pencils C. penciles D. a pencil 4) My father ……………………volleyball every morning. A. play B. is playing C. playing D. plays 5) …………………….do you go to bed ? At ten o’clock . A. How B. When C. What time D. Where 6) ………………………..is in the country. A. Lan’s house B. Lan’ house C. House of Lan D. Lan of house 7) This is my father . ……………………car is very new . A. My B. Her C. Their D. His 8) She ……………………television at home now. A. watches B. watch C. is watching D. watching 9) Our classroom is on the …………………floor. A. one B. second C. two D. three 10)There is a flower garden in front ………………my house. A. of B. to C. at D. on QUESTION 2: Khoanh tròn từ không cùng nhóm 1) A. teacher B. worker C. driver 2) A. telephone B. restaurant C. hotel 3) A. my B. your C. he 4) A. this B. they C. that. D. eraser D. hospital D. our D. these. QUESTION 3: Đọc kỹ đoạn văn rồi làm các bài tập bên dưới Nam is a student at Le Loi school in Nha Trang city. That is a big school. He is in grade 6. He lives in the city with his father, mother and sister. His house is small but very nice. It is between the bookstore and the photocopy store. Nam’s father is an engineer. He works in a factory. His mother is a doctor in a hospital. His sister is a student at Le Loi school, too. She is a good student. Every day, Nam goes to school by bike. His classes start at 7 o’clock and finish at 11 o’clock in the morning ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span> *T/F a) b) c) d). Nam ’s school is big. His house is in the country. His father works in the hospital. His house is next to the bookstore.. ..................... ..................... ..................... ...................... * Trả lời các câu hỏi sau: a) Which grade is Nam in? b) What does his mother do? c) How does Nam go to school every day? d) What time do his classes start and finish? QUESTION 4: Viết một đoạn văn ngắn nói về Lan, dùng các từ gợi ý 1) Lan / student / Hung Vuong school / Ninh Hoa // 2) She / live / Town / her family // 3) Her house / next / market // 4) Her parents / work / hospital // 5) She / go / school / bike / every day // 6) Her parents / travel / work / motorbike / every day //. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Học các kiến thức ngữ pháp - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Revision V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………………....... Ngày soạn: The 54th period TEST CORRECTION I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng biết kiến thức mình học như thế nào, những lỗi hay mắc phải và cách sửa chữa, giúp GV đánh giá được năng lực của từng học sinh và phương pháp giảng dạy của mình 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ học tập tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span> Phương pháp giao tiếp III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) Học sinh tự đánh giá về bài kiểm tra, có gì cần lưu ý? ……………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(28)’. 4. Củng cố: (2’) - GV nhắc lại những kiến thức chính trong bài 5. Hướng dẫn về nhà: ( 3’) - Làm lại toàn bộ các bài tập. Học các kiến thức ngữ pháp - Chuẩn bị bài mới: Revision V. RÚT KINH NGHIỆM. .......................................................................................................................................... ……………………………………………………………………………………….......

<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span> Ngày soạn: The 55th period UNIT 9: THE BODY Lesson 1: A. Parts of the body.( 1;2) I. MỤC TIÊU CỦA BÀI HỌC. 1. Kiến thức: Sau khi hoàn thành bài học, học sinh sẽ có khả năng thuộc và kể được một số bộ phận ngoài của cơ thể; ôn lại cấu trúc What is that?/ Whats are those? 2. Thái độ: Giúp HS có thái độ học tập tốt hơn 3. Kỹ năng: Phát triển cả 4 kỹ năng của học sinh II. PHƯƠNG PHÁP. Phương pháp giao tiếp.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span> III. CHUẨN BỊ. 1.Giáo viên: phòng Tiếng Anh 2.Học sinh: sách tham khảo, SGK, SBT IV. TIẾN TRÌNH TIẾT DẠY. 1. Tổ chức lớp (2’) Tiết Thứ. Ngày tháng. Lớp 6A 6B. Sĩ số. HS vắng. 2. Kiểm tra (10’) Học sinh tự đánh giá về bài kiểm tra, có gì cần lưu ý? ……………………………………………………………………………….. 3.Bài mới:(28)’ Teacher/ s activities. Students/ activities. TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: his head / chest; his shoulders/ arms / hands legs/ feet / fingers / toes. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Rub out and Remember: - Introduces the words & helps Ss to read to remember. - Erasers the words in un-order & asks Ss to read. - Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the circle - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.. contents. STUDENTS' WORKS. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. - Reading the words to remember. - Rewriting the words in the circle. - Correcting the pronunciation mistakes. his head his shoulders. his chest; his arms. &. the. his toes. his hands.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span> his legs II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 3. Picture drill: A1 - P 96. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.. his feet. his fingers. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: A2-P97. S1: What is that ? S2: That is his head. S1: What are those ? S2: Those are his shoulders.. III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 3. Wordsquare: - Introduces the word-square & asks Ss to work in groups to find out the 14 hidden words. – Asks Ss to give the words in two groups by circling the words & put them into a present progressive statement & write on the board. - Corrects & Comments the game. * Answer keys: HEAD; FINGER;SHOULDER HANDS; FOOT. ARMS; LEGS; CHEST; TOES. - Working in groups to find out the hidden words. - Giving the words in two groups by circling the words & put them into a present progressive statement & write on the board. H A T F H Q O S. E K R I D E R H. A L A N R M R O. D A V G I A H U. O X W T C T F E H A O W E R O T S M T O T S T E A N D S L D E R. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & example exchange. - Exercise: A1- P84. Workbook. - Read the text A3 – P97 at home & prepare the pictures on P97. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span> ................................ Preparing's day: 1/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 9: the body Lesson 2: parts of the body.( A1-2)(cont.) Period: 56 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in adjectives to describe physical appearance. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe theirs physical appearance. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Hang man.. - Introduces the symbols & asks Ss ------- ( fingers) to give the letters to form the ----- (chest) ---- (arm) words. ---- (feet) ---- (legs) - Corrects S’s answers & comments. III. New lesson :. TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: tall  short (adj); fat  thin (adj); heavy  light (adj). - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span> - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Noughts & Crosses: - Introduces the cues & divides the class into two groups to play the game. - Corrects & Comments the game. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 3. True / False repetition drill: A4 –P98. - Reads the cues & asks Ss to repeat in chorus if the cue is true & keep silent if the cue is false. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. * Teacher: P. a: She’s thin She’s tall P. b: He’s thin He’s He’s fat P. c: He’s short He’s P. d: small He’s tall heavy She’s She’s tall She’s thin short. individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. - Playing the game.. - Corrects & Comments the game.. tall small quiet. big thin light. Fat Short heavy. - Repeating if the cue is true & keep silent if the cue is false. - Correcting the pronunciation * Student: Repea t Silent She’s Silent fat Silent. Repeat Repeat Repea Repeat t Silent Repea t Repea t. Repea t. III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 3. Prediction: A4 – P98. - Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to work in individual to predict the adjectives to fill in. - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction . - Helps Ss to listen to the tape & check their prediction. - Corrects & Comments S’s prediction. 4. Grid: With answer keys. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to listen to the tape & write the order of the. - Working in individual to predict the adjectives to fill in. - Comparing & give their prediction. * Answer: Pa. Thin / light; Pb. Fat / heavy. Pc. Tall / heavy; Pd. Short / fat.. - Listening to the tape & writing the order of the people described..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span> people described. - Comparing & giving their information. - Asks Ss to compare & give their information. - Corrects & Comments S’s information. Tall ? short ? thin ? fat ? Listen Picture a ( thin - tall ) 4 Picture b ( short – fat ) 3 Picture c ( tall – fat ) 2 Picture d ( short – fat ) 1 IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & example exchange. - Exercise: A3 & 4- P84. Workbook. - Prepare the pictures on P100. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... Preparing's day: 3/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 9: the body Lesson 3: faces(b1) Period: 57 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in face vocabulary ( nouns & adjectives )to describe people’s faces. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their faces. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Pelmanism. - Introduces the words & asks Ss to choose the pairs of antonym adjectives..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span> -. FAT TALL HEAVY THIN SHORT LIGHT Corrects S’s answers & comments.. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: ROR. his eyes/ ears/ lips/ teeth his hair/ nose/ mouth. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Slap the board. - Introduces the picture of the people’s face & divides the class into two groups to play the game. - Corrects & Comments the game. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.. BIG SMALL. STUDENTS' WORKS. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. - Playing the game. - Commenting the game.. His eyes. His nose His lips. NOISY QUIET. his hair. his teeth. his ear.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span> II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. Presentation text: B1 – 100. - Introduces the six pictures on page 100 (a – f) - Practicing in individual. & helps Ss to practice. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Checks S’s practicing in individual.  Model sentences: - introduces the model sentence. a round face - an oval face - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. full lips - thin lips long hair - short hair III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 4. Word square. - Introduces the wordsquare & divides the - Finding out the 17 hidden words in the class into two groups & asks them to find out square. the 17 hidden words in the square. - Giving the words. - Asks Ss to give the words. H A I R X P - Corrects & comments. N E F A T I * Answer key: E O Y F E N hair; fat; see; the; mouth; out; heavy. A B S E E G ear; arm; near; toe; to; feet; R T H E T E teeth; fingers. M O U T H R nose; eye. H E A V Y S IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary. - Exercise: B1 & 2- P85. Workbook. - Prepare the pictures on P101. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... WEEK: 20 Preparing's day: 5/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 9: the body Lesson 4: faces(b2-3) Period: 58 A.Objectives:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span> - Helps Ss to practice in adjectives of color to describe features. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their features. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Jumbled words. - Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the correct words. Yees = eyes; hari = hair; cefa = face; Spli = lips dreshouls = shoulders. sone = nose - Corrects S’s answers & comments. III. New lesson : 3. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: ROR. B2.P101. black; gray; red; blue; brown; white; yellow; green - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the the mistakes. pronunciation. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the - Copying the words. meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Finding friends: - Introduces the requirements & the table then - Making sentences: asks Ss to make sentences:  She has brown hair.  She has brown hair.  She has green eyes. Etc…  She has green eyes. Etc… - Going to the board & taking note their - Asks Ss to go to the board & take note their friends appearances. friends appearances & Comments . She/ has… eyes hair lips teeth black gray.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span> blue White Brown red green. II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. Dialogue build: B3 – 101. - Read the dialogue & presents the symbols for the words & asks Ss to repeat to remember the dialogue. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Asks Ss to build the dialogue. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.. - Repeating the dialogue to remember. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Building the dialogue. - Correcting the pronunciation & building the dialogue. * Dialogue: Hoa: I have a new doll. Mai: What color is her hair ? Hoa: It’s black. Mai: What color are her eyes ? Hoa: They are brown.. III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M. 2. Picture drill: B3/ P 101. - Introduces the example exchange & the - Repeating in chorus & in individual. pictures then helps Ss to practice. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss - Practicing in groups & in pairs . to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. * Example exchange: - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in S1: What color is her hair ? groups & in pairs . S2: It’s black. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1: What color are her eyes ? * Note: Using pictures of the four dolls on page S2: They are brown. 101. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the model sentences. - Prepare the pictures on P 100 & 101 for B1 – 4 – 5 - 6. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .........................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span> Preparing's day: 6/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 9: the body Lesson 5: faces(4-6) Period: 59 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to further practice in body vocabulary to describe people. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use body vocabulary to describe people. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M. 1. Vocabulary: ROR. round – a round face; oval – an oval face full/ thin – full/ thin lips; long/ short – long/ short hair. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in meaning, using the situation. individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words. corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Prediction: B4 – P 101. - Introduces the close text & asks Ss to work in pairs to predict the information to fill in - Working in pairs to predict the information the gap. & filling in the gap. - Asks Ss to give their information. - Giving the information. - Comments the information. - Commenting the information. * Answer key: * Miss Chi is tall and thin. She has a round face, long black hair, brown eyes, a small * Miss Chi is ___ and thin. She has a ___.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span> nose, thin lips and small white teeth. II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M 3. Presentation text: B4 - P101. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts about Miss. Chi & correct their prediction. - Asks Ss to compare their information. - Corrects comments. 4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P76. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the - Helps Ss to correct & comments. * Questions: a. Is Miss. Chi’s hair long or short ? b. What color are her eyes ? c. Are her lips full or thin ? d. What color is her hair ? e. Is her nose big or small ?. face, ___ ___ hair, ___ eyes, a ___ nose, ___ lips and small ___ teeth. -Reading the texts about Miss. Chi & correcting their prediction. - Comparing their information. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Correcting the answer keys & Commenting. * Answer keys: A. Chi’s hair is long. B. Her eyes are brown. C. They are full. D. Her hair is black. E. Her nose is small.. III.POST- READING Time: 10 M 5. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to - Working in pairs to asks & answer work in pairs to asks & answer something something about themselves & take note into about themselves & take note into the table. the table. - Asks Ss to give their information & - Giving their information. comments. My partner My Mum My Dad My Brother My Sister Body Thin Face Round Hair Short - black Eyes Etc… Nose IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M) - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts. - Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey. - Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106. VI.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span> .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... Preparing's day: 6/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 10: staying healthy Lesson 1: how do you feel? (a1,2,5) Period: 60 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in talking about how we feel using adjectives of Physical state. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how we feel. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision ( 5 M ) : Picture cues. - Asks Ss to work in pairs, take it in turn to point at the different picture on page 104-105 & ask and answer. Using the exchange: S1: What’s this color ? S2: It’s green. - Corrects & comments. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M. 1.Vocabulary: hungry (adj); thirsty (adj); full (adj); tired (adj); hot (adj); cold (adj); - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Matching:. STUDENTS' WORKS. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span> - Presents the words & the meaning into two - Working in individual to match. column then asks Ss to work in individual to hungry (adj); l ạnh match the word to its meaning. thirsty (adj); nóng - Corrects & comments. full (adj); đói tired (adj); khát hot (adj); mệt cold (adj); no II.PRACTICE Time: 20 M. 3. Word cue drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps * Example exchange: Ss to practice. S1: How do you feel ? - Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: I’m [ hungry]. Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing - Practicing in groups & in pairs . in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT COLD TIRED FULL 4. Picture drill: A1-P104 + A5-P106 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. * Example exchange: - Reads the first model for example & asks S1: How does he/she feel ? Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. S2: He/she is [ hungry]. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: How do they feel ? - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing S2: They are [ hungry]. in groups & in pairs . - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. 5. Matching: - Introduces the requirements & asks Ss to - Listening to the tape & matching the right listen to the tape & match the right name name with the pictures on page 106. with the pictures on page 106. - Comparing & giving their matching. - Asks Ss to compare & give their matching. - Helps SS to correct & comments. III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 5 M 4. Guessing game: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Writing their physical state on a piece of write their physical state on a piece of paper paper then ask the other to guess. then ask the other to guess. - Playing the game. - Helps Ss to play the game. * Example exchange: -Corrects & comments. S1: Are you thirsty ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span> S2: No, I’m not. S1: Are you hot ?… IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to give the way to ask & answer about their physical state. S1: How do you feel ? S2: I’m [ hungry]. S1: How does he/she feel ? S2: He/she is [ hungry]. S1: How do they feel ? S2: They are [ hungry]. V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-P87. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 105 & what you like to eat or drink. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ................................ WEEK: 21 Preparing's day: 8/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 10: staying healthy Lesson 2: how do you feel? (a3-4) Period: 61 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to read a dialogue to recognize polite offers & requests with “What would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to recognize the polite offers & requests. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span> B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 15 M. 1. Vocabulary: Some Orange Juice = A Drink (N); Some Noodle (N); (To) Like . (To) Want = Would Like; - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Predict Dialogue: - Introduces the open dialogue & asks Ss to work in pairs to predict the suitable words to fill in the gaps to complete the dialogue. - Asks Ss to give their prediction. - Comments their prediction.. STUDENTS' WORKS. - Repeating The Words In Chorus & In Individual. - Correcting The Mistakes. - Giving The Meaning & The Pronunciation. - Copying The Words.. - Working In Pairs To Predict The Suitable Words To Fill In The Gaps To Complete The Dialogue. - Giving Their Prediction. * Open Dialogue: Nam: How Do You Feel ? Lan: I’m ………And……… Nam: What would you like ? Lan: I’d like some……… What about you ? Nam: I’m…… I’d like some………. II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M 3. Presentation dialogue. A3-P105.. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue between Nam & Lan & get the details. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. - Corrects comments. 4. Matching: - Introduces the poster & asks Ss to read the dialogue again & match the key words to the people. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.. - Reading the dialogue. - Checking their prediction.. - Working in pairs to read the dialogue again & matching the key words to the people. - Comparing & giving the keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span> - Helps Ss to correct & comments. Hot Lan Nam Ba Tired hot Thirsty Full Hungry Noodles A drink To sit down III.POST- READING Time: 10 M 5. Mapped dialogue: - Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to read - Reading the dialogue to remember. to remember. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups - Completing the dialogue. & in pairs. - Asks Ss to complete the dialogue. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. * Example exchange: S1: How do you fell ? …fell ? S2: I’m cold and hungry. …cold + hungry S1: What would you like ? …like ? S2: I’d like some noodles. How do you fell ? …some noodles…fell ? S!: I’m thirsty. …thirsty S2: What would you like ? …like ? S1: I’d like some orange juice. … orange juice. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & give the form of the polite offers & requests with “What would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”. V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the dialogue. - Exercise: 2-P87- workbook. - Prepare the pictures on page 110 & the menu. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span> Preparing's day: 12/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 10: staying healthy Lesson 3: food and drink (B1-3) Period: 62 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative & Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars to talk about food & drink correctly. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. Some / Any with There is / There are, Positive, Negative & Yes / No questions II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Networks. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to give the food & drink that food Drink they usually have. - Comments. rice meat Milk a drink III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. an apple (n); an orange (n); a banana (n); some water (n). - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Dictation list: - Presents the words & the table then asks Ss. STUDENTS' WORKS. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.. - Working in individual to list..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span> to listen & put the words into the correct A AN SOME column. Banana An apple Rice - Asks Ss to compare & giving their list. Hot drink An orange Water - Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. Cold drink Milk * Teacher reads: Vegetables An apple; An orange Rice; Water Milk Meat; Vegetables Meat; Noodle; Bread Banana Noodle Hot drink; Cold drink 3. Presentation dialogue: B2-P109 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue dialogue & introduces the model sentence. -Correcting the pronunciation. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups * Model sentences: & in pairs. (+) There is some rice - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. (?) Is there any rice ? (-) There isn’t any rice. (+) There are some rice (?) Are there any rice ? (-) There aren’t any rice. 4. Comprehension: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Ticking what for lunch on the list. - Comparing & giving the key. tick what for lunch on the list. Meat  Fruit  - Asks Ss to compare & give the key. Rice  Water  - Corrects & comments. noodles Milk II.PRACTICE Time 15 M 5. Picture drill: B1-P108 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Example exchange: Ss to practice. S1: Is there any… ? - Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: Yes, there is some… Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. No, there isn’t any… - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: Are there any… ? - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing S2: Yes, there are some… in groups & in pairs. No, there aren’t any… - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to give the way to use Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative & Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span> - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-2-3 P91 &92. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 112 & what you like to eat or drink. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... Preparing's day: 15/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 10: staying healthy Lesson 4: food and drink (B4-5) Period: 63 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” correctly. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. “What would you like ?” - “I’d like some…” II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice fruit/ milk/ vegetable (a vegetable). - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. the mistakes. -Copying the words..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span> - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Matching / Grid: - Presents the tape & the table then asks Ss - Working in individual to match. to listen & match the names of the people with what they would like. a b c d e f g - Asks Ss to compare & giving their Nhan x x matching. Tuan x x - Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. Huong x x Mai x 2. Presentation dialogue: B4-P110. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & introduces the model sentence. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M. 3. Picture drill: B4-P110 & B5-P111. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 10 M 4. Chain game: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to talk about what they would like in turn. - Helps Ss to play the game. -Corrects & comments.. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):. h. x. - Listening & Practicing the dialogue -Correcting the pronunciation. * Model sentences: - I’d like some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice fruit/ milk/ vegetable. Example exchange: S1: What would you like ? S2: I’d like some [ fish ] - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation.. - Talking about what they would like in turn. - Playing the game. * Example: S1: I’d like some fish. S2: I’d like some fish & some vegetable. S3: I’d like some fish & some vegetables & some orange juice. S4:….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span> - Asks Ss to give the uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?”. V. Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-2 P88. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 108 & what you like to eat or drink. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... WEEK: 22 Preparing's day: 20/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 10: staying healthy Lesson 5: MY FAVORITE FOOD ( C 1-5). Period: 64 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in speaking about favorite food & drink to contrast “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their favorite food & drink. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. my favorite food/ drink; some carrots/ beans/ peas/ iced tea. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span> - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Picture drill: B1-P108 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 3. ROR dialogue: C2-P112. - Introduces the dialogue by giving the symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to remember. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Introduces the model sentence. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.. individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.. * Example exchange: S1: What are these ? S2: They are beans. What are those? S1: They are carrots. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Listening & Practicing the dialogue -Correcting the pronunciation. * Model sentences: S1: Do you like vegetables ? S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. S1: Would you like some vegetables ? S2: Yes, I would. / Yes, please. No, I wouldn’t. / No, thank you. II.PRACTICE Time 15 M 4. Word cue drill: - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Example exchange: Ss to practice. S1: Do you like [ beans ] ? - Reads the first modal for example & asks S2: Yes, I do. / [No, I don’t ]. Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. S1: Would you like some [ beans ] now ? - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S2: No, thank you./ Yes, please. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. beans peas carrots milk iced tea oranges rice apple III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span> 5. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Working in pairs to interview each other & work in pairs to interview each other about taking note the information into the table. their favorite food & drink using the given - Reporting the information about their question & take note the information into the friends. table. - Asks Ss to report the information about * Question: Do you like chicken ? their friends using the model. * Feedback: Nam likes chicken & orange but - Corrects & comments. he doesn’t like fish… Name Likes… Doesn’t like… Nam Chicken & orange Fish IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to contrast “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?” V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 4-5 92. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 114 & what you like to eat or drink. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... Preparing's day: 21/1/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 11: what do you eat? Lesson 1: at the store (A1) Period: 65 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to practice in quantifiers ( a kilo of…) & containers ( a bottle of…) to talk about people buy at the store. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about quantifiers & containers. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. Quantifiers & Containers. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span> II- Revision III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. some eggs/ chocolates; some oil/ beef/ soap/ toothpaste. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Matching. - Introduces the phrases & the pictures then asks Ss to work in individual to match the picture to the correct word . - Asks Ss to compare their matching & match. - Corrects & comments.. STUDENTS' WORKS. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.. - Working in individual to match the picture to the correct word . grams of a kilo of a can of a bar of a box of a tube of a packet of a dozen a bottle of. II.PRACTICE Time 25 M 3. ROR dialogue: A1a-P114. - Introduces the dialogue by giving the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen -Correcting the pronunciation. to the dialogue. - Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to * Model sentences: remember. S1: Can I help you ? - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please. & in pairs. S1: Here you are. - Introduces the model sentence. S2: Thank you. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 4. Picture drill: A1b-P115..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span> - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. * Example exchange: - Reads the first modal for example & asks S1: Can I help you ? Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: Here you are. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing S2: Thank you. in groups & in pairs. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. 5. Substitution drill: - Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to - Reading the model & the substituted words read the model then reads the substituted - Reading the substitution sentence. words & asks Ss to read the substitution - Practicing in individual. sentence. - Correcting the pronunciation & the - Asks Ss to practice in individual. substitution. - Corrects the pronunciation & comments. * Teacher reads: * Ss repeat: water; oil; soap; peas; beans; coke; I’d like a bottle of water, please. chocolates; eggs; tea; noodles I’d like a bar of soap, please. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2M ): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-2 P.93. Workbook. - Prepare the picture on page 116 & Things on page 117. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... Preparing's day: 1/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 11: what do you eat? Lesson 2: at the store (A2) Period: 66 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about quantities for food shopping..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span> I.Knowledge: -‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….; How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun).. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Dictation lists: with "How much........?" " How many........?" T reads: oranges, meat, milk, bread, carrots, chocolates, beef, chicken, rice, eggs, apples, soap. Answer key: How much....?: meat, milk, bread, beef, chicken, rice, soap. How many....? :oranges, carrots, chocolates, eggs, apples III. New lesson : Teacher's works Students'works I.Presentation.(10ms) 1.Presentation dialogue. A2 P.116 -Ss read the dialogue and answer the From the dialogue, T sets a sence to give the questions of the teacher. model sentences. 1)I need/ want some beef. How much do you need/ want? -Ss give the concept check. 2)I need/ want some eggs. How many do you need/ want? II.Practice.(20ms) "Blackboard drill" T shows the way to ask ss practice well. -Ss read the key words and practice well. Shopping list 300g. beef 1k rice 500g. beans 6 apples 1 dozen eggs 2 bottles milk 3 packets noodles Example exchanges: S1:I need some beef. S2:How much do you want?. -Ss practice in pair..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span> S1:Three hundred grams, please. .......etc. -T controls and corrects. III.Production (10ms) -Take notes. "Role play" T asks each ss writes a shopping list. In pair, ss take it in turns to be the storekeeper and the -Ss work in role to practice well. customer. Storekeeper Customer Can I help you? I want/ need.... How much/ I'd like.... many.....? Anything else? Do you have any....... That's....dong, .......please. please. .......Thank you ! -T corrects. -Take notes. IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2m) -Doing exercise : A3 in the notebook. -Preparing: Unit 11: B1, 3-4 C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... WEEK 23 Preparing's day: 1/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 11: what do you eat? Lesson 3: at the store (A3-4) Period: 67 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about quantities for food shopping. I.Knowledge:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span> -‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….; How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun).. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M. 1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid) - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work - Working in pairs to predict which the in pairs to predict which the statements is statements is true or false. - Comparing & Giving the keys. true or false. Yes No - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys …big ? √ & Comments …small ? √ …a yard ? √ …a well ? √ …flowers ? √ … trees ? √ II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M: 2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Listening to the dialogue & getting the dialogue & get the details. details. - Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check - Listening to the dialogue & checking the the prediction & Corrects. prediction. III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M. 3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board. a garden (n); a vegetable (n); a photo (n). - Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in meaning, using the situation. individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words. corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span> meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 4.True / False statement prediction: - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict which the statements is true or false. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys & Comments.. * Answer keys: 1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T; IV.WHILE-READING Time: 10 M 5. Presentation text: A2-P73. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter & get the details. - Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter. - Corrects comments. 6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the house ? b. Is the house beautiful ? c. Is there a flowers garden behind the house? d. Is there a lake to the right of the house? e. Is Nga in the city ? V.POST-LISTENING & READING Time:5 M 7. Transformation writing: - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in individual to change the underlined information to describe their own house & then draw a picture of it as a photo . - Asks Ss to give their information & comments.. - Working in pairs to predict which the statements is true or false. - Comparing & Giving the keys. * Statements: 1. The house is in the country. 2. There is a river near the house. 3. There’re trees to the left of the house. 4. There’re two gardens. - Reading the letter & get the details. - Giving the main idea of the letter.. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting A. Yes, it is. B. No, it isn’t. C. No, she isn’t. D. Yes, there is.. E. No, there isn’t.  Answer: a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E; e – C.. - Writing in individual & giving the information. * My house: There’s a flowers garden in front of the house. There’s a vegetable garden behind the house. To the left of the house, there’s a lake. To the right of the house, there are tall trees. Here is a photo..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span> IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter. - Prepare the picture on page 74. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... Preparing's day: 3/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 11: what do you eat? Lesson 4: at the canteen (b1,3,4) Period: 68 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to practice in Offers and Requests for Food and Drink. I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : Teacher's activities Students'activities I.Practice. 1.Kim's game.(10m) B1 P.119. T asks Ss play it in team to taking it in -Ss enjoy the game. turns to fill up the lists on the board. -Ss play it in team to taking it in turns to fill - Asks Ss to give their information & up the lists on the board. comments. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. There's a.. There's There are - Giving the answer keys. some.... some.... - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting -can of -rice - vegetables soda.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span> .... -milk -apples ...........etc .....etc. ........etc. -T corrects. 2.Matching.(10M) B4 P.120. T shows the way to ask ss to play. - Asks Ss to give their information & comments. a b c d e f g h i j k l 2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8 -T corrects. 3.Word cue drill.(10m) T shows the way to ask ss to practice well. - Asks Ss to give their information & comments. bread/ milk fish/ soda noodles/ water chicken/ iced tea rice/ orange beef/ vegetables/ juice lemonade Example exchanges: B2 P.120 S1:What would you like for breakfast? S2:I'd like some bread and some milk. ............etc. T controls and corrects. II.Production.(10m) - Asks Ss to give their information & comments. 1.Chain game S1: I'd like some fish. S2: I'd like some fish and some rice. S3: I'd like some fish and some rice and a coke. S4:......etc.. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting -Ss read the word cues and practice well.. -Ss work in groups. - Working in groups to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting. IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework (2m). -Doing exercise : B1-2 in the workbook. -Preparing: Unit 11: B5,6 C.Can improved:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span> .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... Preparing's day: 4/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 10: what do you eat? Lesson 5: at the canteen (b4-5) Period: 69 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to talking about price for Food and Drink with " How much/ many................?" I.Knowledge: - The present simple tense. “How much/many...........? II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : Teacher's activities Students'activities I.Presentaetion.(10ms) 1.Pre-teach. T elicits to teach vocab. -Guess the words- listen and repeat. -Fifty =50 - Giving the answer keys. -a hundred ( two hundred....) =100 ( 200) - Correcting the answer keys -a thousand ( two thousand....) = 1.000 ( 2.000) &Commenting -Seven thousand five hundred = 7.5000. 2.Checking vocab. -Slap the board. 100 250. 200. 5.000. -Ss enjoy the game.. 6.200. II.Practice.(25m) 1.Blackboard drill. T shows the way to practice.. -Listen- understand and practice well..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span> 100 50 150 350 1.000 2.000 7.500 9.500. 200 750 5.000 2.300. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting. 4.200 10.000. 2.Noughts and crosses.. 2.500 500 dong 3.000 dong dong 4.800 10.000 1.000 dong dong dong 1.200 8.500 5.000 dong dong dong Example exchange: S1: How much is it? S2: It's two thousand five hundred dong. *Pre-teach.P. 121 -a cake ( n) picture -a sandwich : (n) picture -a fried rice (n) axplaination -an iced cream (n) explaination. -a bowl of (n) picture. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. *Picture drill. B5-6 P.121 Ex: S1: How much is a fried rice? S2: It's two thousand five hundred dong. ........etc. III.Production." survey"(5m) T asks ss to fill the survey according to Real price they know, not the price in the texbook. How much is it ?. a fried rice ...... a bow l of ..... an eras er. a ruler. .... .... -T controls and corrects.. a scho ol bag .... Tieng Anh 6. 11.200 dong. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words.. -Look at the picture and practice well. -Ss fill the survey according to Real price they know, not the price in the texbook..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span> IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2m) -Doing exercise : B3-4 in the workbook. -Preparing: Unit 11:Grammar practice C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... THE END. WEEK: 24 Preparing's day: 5/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Grammar practice Period: 70 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to further practice in Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span> II- Revision III. New lesson : Teacher's activities I.Likes and Dislikes.(20ms) 1.Find someone who. T shows the way to ask ss to practice. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. Find someone who..... Name ....likes fish Lan ....doesn't like chicken ... ....likes bread .... ....doesn't like rice .... ....likes milk ... ....doesn't like soda ... ...Doaesn't like vegetables. ... 2.Write it up. Grammar practice 2 P.122 with "a" "an" "some" - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. a: a sandwich, a banana... an: an orange, an ice cream.... some: some noodles, some fish.... -T corrects. 3.Guessing game. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys.. Students'activities -Listen and practice. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting Epected: S1: Do you like fish? S2: yes, I do. S1: What your name? S2: My name's Lan. ....etc.. -Ss work individually- share with your partner. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting. -1 or 2 ss go to the boad then play the game. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span> - Corrects & comments. Example: I'd like some milk. S1: Would you like a sandwich? S2: No, I wouldn't. S1: Would you like some milk? S2: yes, I would. ........etc. II Adjectives.(20ms) 1.Grammar practice 3 P.123. "Pelmanism" - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. T shows the way to practice. tall long hot fat heavy weak short short cold thin lihgt strong 2.Question words. Grammar pracrice 4 P.123 - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. 3.Present simple $ present progressive. Grammar practice 5 P.123. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. 4.Quantifiers. "lucky number" 1.What does cooking oil come in? 2.What does tea come in? 3.L. - Working in pairs to match the questions to the answers. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting. -Ss play in groups ( 2 groups). -Do the exercises.. -Ss enjoy the game..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span> 4.What does soap come in? 5 What does soda come in? 6.L -Take notes. 7. What does iced tea come in? 8.What do noodles come in? -T corrects. IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2m) -Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book. -Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2 C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... THE END Preparing's day: 6/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Written test Period: 71 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : Full name : …………................……………… Class :6............

<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span> I.. Choose the best answers (4ms). 1. Is her hair short ? -No,it isn’t . It’s ………………. A,short B,long C,black D,yellow 1........................... 2. Is your mother thin or fat ? - She is ………………….. A, light B,thin C,tall D,heavy 2........................... 3. Thanh has ………………… A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval D,round face 3............................ 4. What color are her eyes ? -They’re …………………. A,long B,round C,black D,small 4........................... 5. I have………………..hair. A,long black B,a long black C,black longD,a black long 5........................... 6. ………….does he feel ? A,How B,What C, How much D, How many 6........................... 7. ………………you like noodles? A,What B,Are C,Would D,Which 7............................ 8. I’m ……………..I’d like some fish and rice A, cold B, hot C, hungry D, thirsty 8........................... 9. What would you like …………dinner? A,in B,on C,at D,for 9........................... 10.There aren’t …………….apples on the table A,any B,some C,a D,an 10.......................... 11.Can I …………… you? A,have B,help C,has D,do 11......................... 12.How ……………..milk do you want? A,many B,much C,some D,any 12......................... 13.I’d like …………….bananas,please..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span> A,any B,some C,an D,a 13......................... 14.How many oranges do you want? A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen D,A kilos 14......................... 15.Can I help you ? -……………..of cooking oil,please. A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle 15.......................... 16. A fried rice ……………….2,500d A, is B,are C, do D ,does 16.......................... II. Put a/an/some/any (1m) 1. 2. 3. 4.. There is ……….. bar of soap. I’d like ………….apple. Is there ……….. milk ? There are ………..bananas. 1: ...................... 2: ....................... 3: ...................... 4:........................ III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms) green black. head toe finger egg. chicken red. Face. 1. Color :………………………………………… 2. Body : toe, ………………………………….. 3. Food :………………………………………….. IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket (1,5 ms) 1. He ……………………..( ride ) his bike everyday. 2. Lan ……………………….( watch ) television now 3. You can ……………………..(park ) here 4. My father................................(walk-not) to school everyday, he .......................... (go) to school by motorbike. 5. They...........................(wait) for a bus at the moment. V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms) 1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ? 1………………………………………………………………….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span> 2. How / beef/ he / want ? 2…………………………………………………………………... 3. How/ oranges/ she / want? 3....................................................................................................... THE END Preparing's day: 7/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Tr¶ bµi kiÓm tra 1 tiÕt Period: 72 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : Teacher's activities I.Choose the best answers (4ms) /Time: 10m 1.Is her hair short ? -No,it isn’t . It’s ………………. A,short B,long C,black D,yellow 1. Is your mother thin or fat ? - She is ………………….. A, light B,thin C,tall D,heavy 2. Thanh has ………………… A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval D,round face 3............................ 3. What color are her eyes ?. Students'activities - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. Key: 1.B 2.B 3.B.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span> -They’re …………………. A,long B,round C,black D,small 4. I have………………..hair. A,long black B,a long black C,black longD,a black long 5. ………….does he feel ? A,How B,What C, How much D, How many 6. ………………you like noodles? A,What B,Are C,Would D,Which 7. I’m ……………..I’d like some fish and rice A, cold B, hot C, hungry D, thirsty 8. What would you like …………dinner? A,in B,on C,at D,for 9. There aren’t …………….apples on the table A,any B,some C,a D,an 10.Can I …………… you? A,have B,help C,has D,do 11.How ……………..milk do you want? A,many B,much C,some D,any 12......................... 12.I’d like …………….bananas,please. A,any B,some C,an D,a 14.How many oranges do you want? A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen D,A kilos 15.Can I help you ? -……………..of cooking oil,please. A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle 16. A fried rice ……………….2,500d A, is B,are C, do D ,does 16........................... 4.C 5.A 6.A 7.C 8.C 9.D 10.A 11.B 12.B 13.B 14.B 15.D 16.A. II. Put a/an/some/any (1m) /Time: 5m. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span> 1.There is ……….. bar of soap. 2.I’d like ………….apple. 3.Is there ……….. milk ? 4.There are ………..bananas. 1: ...................... 2: ....................... 3: ...................... 4:........................ III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)/ Time: 5m green black. head toe finger egg. chicken red. Face. 1.Color :………………………………………… 2.Body : toe, ………………………………….. 3.Food :…………………………………………... IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket (1,5 ms) /Time: 10m 1. He ……………………..( ride ) his bike everyday. 2. Lan ……………………….( watch ) television now 3. You can ……………………..(park ) here 4. My father................................(walk-not) to school everyday, he ..........................(go) to school by motorbike. 5. They...........................(wait) for a bus at the moment. V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms) /Time: 10m 1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ? 2. How / beef/ he / want ? 3. How/ oranges/ she / want?. complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. KEY: 1.A 2.AN 3.ANY 4.SOME - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. Key: 1.Color: green, black,red 2.Body: toe,head,face,finger 3.food:chicken, - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss to complete. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. Key: 1.rides 2.is watching 3.park 4.doesn’t walk /goes 5.are waiting Key: 1.What would she like for dinner? 2.How much beef does he want?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span> 3.How many oranges does she want? IV. Consolidation.(2m) -T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this lesson. V.Homework.(2m) -Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book. -Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2 C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ............................... THE END. WEEK: 25 Preparing's day: 7/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 12: sports and pastimes Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2) Period: 73 A.Objectives: Helps Ss to practice in Present Progressive & sport vocabulary. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what people are doing now. I.Knowledge: -Present progressive. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span> Jumbled words. - Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the correct words. Torps = sport; bolfatol = football; belvalylol = volleyball; Mage = game; sucim = music; lietoseniv = television - Corrects S’s answers & comments. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1.Vocabulary: - ROR. (to) swim; (to) play badminton; (to) jog; (to) do aerobics; (to) skip; (to) play table tennis;. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. - Correcting the mistakes. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -Copying the words. the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Dictation list: - Presents the words & the table then asks Ss - Working in individual to list. 2 people 1 person to listen & put the words into the correct column. - Asks Ss to compare & giving their list. - Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments. * Teacher reads: play football; jog; do aerobics; play tennis; play table tennis; play volleyball. 3. Presentation dialogue: A1-P124. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Listening & Practicing the dialogue dialogue & introduces the example -Correcting the pronunciation. exchange. - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups *Example exchange: S1: What are they doing? & in pairs. S2: They’re playing soccer. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. S1: What is She / he doing ? S2: She / he skipping. II.PRACTICE Time 10 M.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span> 4. Picture drill: A1-P124. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. *Example exchange: S1: What are they doing? S2: They’re playing soccer. S1: What is She / he doing ? S2: She / he skipping.. III.Further practice Time: 10 M 5. Noughts & Crosses: -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in - Working in groups to choose the cue & groups to choose the picture & make the make the question & the answer. question & the answer. - Corrects & comments. *Example exchange: S1: Picture C. S1: What are they doing? S2: They’re playing soccer. Picture C Picture A Picture B Picture F Picture D Picture E Picture H Picture G Picture I IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): - Asks Ss to summarize the lesson. V.Homework(Time: 2M): - Study the model sentences & the vocabulary. - Exercise: 1-2 P.103. Workbook. - Prepare the pictures on page 125 . C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ........................ Preparing's day: 17/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 12: sports and pastimes Lesson 2: What are you doing? (a3-5) Period: 74.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span> A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to read a short text about sport, & practicing “WHICH” questions with simple present tense. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about people regular exercise. I.Knowledge “WHICH” questions with simple present tense.: II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Slap the board. - Introduces the words & helps Ss to practice in two groups. Môn bóng bàn môn cầu lông đi bộ thể dục Môn bóng chuyền nhảy dây bơi - Comments the game.. bóng đá môn quần vợt. III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-READING Time: 5 M. 1. Open predict: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to - Working in pairs to predict what sport Lan work in pairs to predict what sport Lan & & Nam like (3 each ). Nam like (3 each ). - Giving Their Prediction. - Asks Ss to give their prediction. Lan Nam - Comments their prediction. 1. 1. 2. 2. 3. 3. II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M 2. Presentation text. A4-P126.. - Reading the text. - Checking their prediction.. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text about Nam & Lan & get the details. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. - Corrects comments. - Working in pairs to answer the questions..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span> 3. Comprehension questions:. - Giving the answers & correcting. * Questions: - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to a. Which sport does Lan play ? work in pairs to answer the questions. b. Does Lan play tennis ? - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. c. Which sport does Nam play ? d. Does Nam play table tennis ? * Answers: a. Lan swim, does aerobics & play badminton. b. No, she doesn’t. c. Nam plays soccer, table tennis, & jogs. d, Yes, he does. III.POST- READING Time: 15 M 4. Picture drill: A3-P125. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps - Making sentences for the next cues. Ss to practice. - Practicing in groups with teacher & in - Reads the first model for example & asks closed pairs . Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the pronunciation - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss in the whole class & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 5. Survey: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask each other about the sports they do & fill the information into the table. - Asks Ss to compare & report the information. - Comments S’s information.. Name Hoa. * Example exchange: S1: Which sport do you do ? S2: I [ play soccer ] & [ swim ]. - Working in pairs to ask each other about the sport they do & filling the information into the table. - Comparing& reporting the information. * Example exchange: S1: Which sport do you do ? S2: I swim. S1: What else ? S2: I play volleyball. S1: Do you play table tennis ? S2: Yes, I do.. Sport Swim. IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2. volleyball. Table tennis.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span> - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson V.Homework Time: 2m: - Study the vocabulary & exchange. - Exercise: 3-4-P104- workbook. - Prepare the pictures on page 127& what you do in your free times. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ........................ Preparing's day: 18/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 12: sports and pastimes Lesson 3: free time (b1-3) Period: 75 A.Objectives: - Helps Ss to write a short text about what they do in their free time. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a short text about what they do in their free time. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision Guessing game. I……..in my free time * Example: - Introduces the words & helps Ss to S1: Do you play ….in your free time ? S2: No, I don’t. practice in two groups. S1: Do you watch TV ? - Comments the game. S2: No, I don’t III. New lesson : TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS I.PRE-WRITING Time: 20 M. 1.Vocabulary: free time;.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span> (to) go fishing; (to) go to the movie. - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the pictures on P78/79. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Checks the meaning & the pronunciation. -Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2. Picture drill: B1-P127. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 3. Transformation writing - B1-P127. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to change “ I “ to the name of people in the pictures. - Asks Ss to compare & give their writing. - Corrects & comments.. II.WHILE-WRITING Time: 15 M 4. Pyramid: - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual to write 3 things about what they do in their free time & put all their sentences together on a poster. - Asks Ss to report their information. - Comments. * Example: + Individual writing: ( San writes ) I watch TV, I go fishing & I. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. *Example exchange: S1: What does Phuong do in his free time? S2: He goes to the movie. - Working in pairs to change “ I “ to the name of people in the pictures. - Comparing & giving their writing. * Answer : a. Phuong goes to the movie. b. Ly watches TV c. Nam reads d. Lan listens to music. e. Tuan goes fishing. f. Long play video games. - Working in individual to write 3 things about what they do in their free time & putting all the sentences together on a poster. - Reporting the information. * Groups writing (poster).. San, Thuy & Chinh watch Tv San & Chinh play football.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span> play football. ( Thuy writes ) I watch TV, I go to the park & I play badminton. ( Chinh writes ) I listen to music, I play football & I watch TV.. San goes fishing Thuy goes to the part & ply badminton Chinh listens to music. IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ) - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): - Study the vocabulary & exchange. - Exercise: 1-2-P104-105 workbook. - Prepare the pictures on page 128 & 129. C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................... Preparing's day: 7/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span> Unit 12: sports and pastimes Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2) Period: 72 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ........................ Preparing's day: 7/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 12: sports and pastimes Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2) Period: 72 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span> II- Revision III. New lesson : C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ........................ Preparing's day: 7/2/2010 Teaching's day: 6G: Unit 12: sports and pastimes Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2) Period: 72 A.Objectives: - Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. I.Knowledge: - Simple present tense -Present progressive. -Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies II.Skill: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B.Teaching procedure: I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m) -Check attendence II- Revision III. New lesson : C.Can improved: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................... Date: 9/3/2007.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span> Period 80 Unit13 activities and the seasons. Lesson 2: A2-3 (*P. 135) A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about your favourite weather and contrast it with ‘’What is the weather like?’’ I.Knowledges : What weather do you like? What is the weather like? II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, . B. Procedures : I. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues : Can tho / hot . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Revision : Wordsquare _ Asks Ss to find out vocab from wordsquare F A L L C O L D X W A R M N S S. Ss work in individually to find out vocab from wordsquare. Listen to the tape to correct their precdictions -. Ss listen and then practice in pairs Ss copy down on their notebook.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span> G N I R P S U E O N L N I O M A T H S I T S M S C O O L K E E O W E A T H E. Work in pairs to practice following example exchange: S1:What weather do you/ they like? S2 : I / Theylike [hot] weather. Work in pairs to make the dia Example: S1: What is the weather like in Ha noi? S2: It’s cold S1: What is the weather like in Can tho? S2: It’s hot S1: What weather do you like? S2 : I like cold weather S1: come to Ha noi S2: What weather do you like? S2 : I like hot weather S1: Come to Can tho.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span> R N Answer keys : Spring : go, got, me, sea,on,summer,season : fall,cold,warm,cool,weather 2 Presentation:A3 P 135 -T reads the text ,then asks Ss to practice Model sentences : What weather do you like? I like hot weather What is the weather like today ? It’s cold 3. Practice : Picture drill/ Word cue drill A3 P135 -Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example exchange: S1 : What weather do you/ they like? S2 : I /Theylike [hot] weather a.She /like/ hotweather b. I /like /cool c. Huy/like/ warm 4. Further practice : Mapped dialogue: -Asks Ss to make the dia Can tho.  . ....Hanoi?. . ...hot ...cold . ...like? ....can tho. . Ha noi. ...cold .. Can tho ? ...like? ...hanoi? ...hot.... IV. Consolidation:  Asks Ss to write the model sentences. V. Homework:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span>  Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 3  Do ex 2,3 P 108 (work book). Date: 9/3/2007 Period 81 Unit13. activities and the seasons. Lesson 3: A4-5 (P. 136) A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to use ‘’when ‘’ clauses in positive statements and ‘’Wh’’ questions I.Knowledges : What questions II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, . B. Procedures : I. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues : She/like/ hot . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1 Presentation: Networks go for a walk listen to music read a book watch TV fly kites play soccer. Pastimes. go swimming. Predict -Asks Ss to predict what Ba does when it’s hot/ cold/ cool/warm Answer keys : a. when it’s hot He goes camping. b. when it’s cold he plays soccer c. when it’s cool he goes jogging d. when it’s warm he goes fishing Presentation Text : A4 P136 -T reads the text ,then asks Ss to read and check their. Ss work in individually to write vocab - go joging , go fishing , play badmimton - do aerobics, go camping Work in groups to predict what Ba does when it’s hot/ cold/ cool/warm. Listen to the text, then read to correct their precdictions.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span> predictions . Model sentences : what does Ba do when it’s hot? Do you He goes swimming . I go. Copy down the model sentences. 3. Practice : Word cue drill -Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example exchange: S1 : When it’s cold do you jog? S2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t a.cold / go jogging ? b. cool/ do aerobics? c. hot / go swimming? d. warm / go to the park? 4. Further practice : Transformation writing: -Asks Ss to change the text about Ba to write about themselves ,using ‘I’ following example : when it’s hot I ...... when it’s cold .I.... when it’s cool.I..... when it’s warm I...... - Then Asks Ss to swap their writing on the board , read their‘s partner’s text then write about their partner,using He/She. Work in pairs to practice following example exchange:. IV. Consolidation:  Asks Ss to write the model sentences. V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 4  Do ex 4 P. 111 (work book). S1 : When it’s cold do you jog? S2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t. Work in pairs to change the text about Ba to write about themselves ,using ‘I’ following example : when it’s hot I ...... when it’s cold ..... when it’s cool...... when it’s warm ...... Then swap their writing on the board , read their‘s partner’s text then write about their partner,using He/She following example : when it’s hot She ...... when it’s cold he... when it’s cool. she..... when it’s warm he.......

<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span> Date : 12 /3/2007 Period 82 Unit13 activities and the seasons. Lesson 4: B1 (*P. 138-9) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in advs of frequency, Simple present , sports vocabulary,season I, Knowledges: sports, seasons vocabulary advs of frequency II,Skills: Speaking III,Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Check the form What do you do whene it's hot? III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities -1 Matching : -Asks SS to match     x never always often usually sometimes. Students' activities Work in individually to match. Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span> 2 Presentation: *Pre -teach: (to) play basketball: ( to) go sailing: T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : What and Where play basketball. cold. hot. Listen and practice the text. go sailing. warm. Work in groups to play this game. weather. Presentation : B1 P 138 -Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text 2.Practice: Answer given: Asks Ss to make questions for the answer a. We often play volleyball? b. They sometimes go sailing c. I often go swimming d. She usually plays badminton e. We always play basketball Answer given: a.What do you do in the spring? b. What do they do in the fall? c. What do you do in the summer ? d.What does do in the fall? e.What do you do in the winter? 3 Production : Lucky Numbers -Asks Ss to play the game by answer the questions 1. Work in individually to make the questions for the answers Then share with their parter in pairs. Work in groups to answer the questions Example : 1 It's cold 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span> 2 3 4 10 11 12 5 9 8 7 6 1 What is the weather like in winter ? 2 What do you usually do in the winter? 3 What do you usually eat in the winter? 4 LN 5 What is the weather like in the spring ? 6 LN 7 Where do you usually go in the summer ? 8 What weather do you like ? 9 What fruit do you like ? 10 LN 11 What is the weather like in the fall ? 12 What sports do you do in the winter? IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 10 Do ex 1,2 P 111-112 11 Prepare Lesson 5 B2. Date 12 /3/2007 Period 83 Unit13 activities and the seasons.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span> Lesson 5: B2 (*P. 139) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk write activities you do in different season I, Knowledges: temperature and seasons vocabulary What 's the weather like ? II,Skills: Writing III,Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Check vocab III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities -1 Pre-Writing: *Brainstorm : summer play in the park. Students' activities. watch TV Activities and seasons go swimming. winter. Work in groups to write vocab. go jogging. hot winter Board drill : B2 P. 139 -Asks Ss to practice the structure S1 : What do you do in the summer ? S2 : I often play tennis Survey : Asks SS to fill in the table by asking and answering follwing example:. Work in pairs to practice the structure S1 : What do you do in the summer ? S2 : I often [ play tennis ]. Name Season Weather usuallygo. Work in pairs to ask and answer follwing.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span> usuallydo usually. example. Hoai fall cool The mountains Go camping A picnic hot drink. Practice the dialogue. .... S1; Which season do you like ? S2;: Fall S1: What's the weather do you like in the fall S2: It's cool S1: Where do you usually do you go ? S2: to the mountains S1: What do you usually do there ? S2: I go camping with my friends S1: What do you usually eat or drink ? S2 We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks Write it up: - Asks SS to write about the friends following example Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually goes camping IV Consolidation: Check the vocab V, Homework: 12 Do ex 4 - Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 1 A1-3 (P 140-141). Work in groups to write about the friends following example Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually goes camping.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span> Date : 20 /3/2007 Period 84 Unit14. making plans. Lesson 1: A1 (*P. 140-141) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk vacation plans I, Knowledges: ''going to , positive statements and Wh 'questions II,Skills: Speaking III,Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Check the form What do you do when it's hot? III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities -1 Presentation: *Pre -teach: the summer vacation ( translation) : kú nghØ hÌ the citadel (picture): thµnh néi (to) stay with ( someone): ë víi ai (to) stay for ( aweek/a day): ë bao nhiªu ngµy my uncle (example): chó ,b¸c t«i my aunt (example): c«, d× t«i (to ) visit ( translation): th¨m T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : Ordering vocabulary A 1 p 140. Students' activities. Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks. Work in individually to listen to.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span> -T reads the text aloud Answer keys : 1 the summer vacation 4(to) stay for ( aweek/a day 6 the citadel 6 my uncle 3 (to) stay with someone 5 my aunt 2 (to ) visit Presentation dialogue : A1 P 140 -Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text - Then asks some questions Answer keys : Visit Hue , with her aunt and uncle, one a week , visit the citadel Model sentences : What are you going to do ? I'm going to visit Hue She's stay for a week 2.Practice: Work Cue Drill: Asks Ss to make questions follwing example exchange : S1: What are you going do this summer ? S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ] 3 Further practice : Find S.O who -Asks Ss to play the game following example exchange : S1: This summer vacation , are you going to [ stay at home ] ? S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not Find someone who is going to Name ,, stay at home. ... visit an aunt or uncle. the text to order vocab. Listen and practice the text Work in individually answers questions. Copy down the form. Work in pairs to answer following example exchange : S1: What are you going do this summer ? S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ] Work in groups to play the game following example exchange : S1: This summer vacation , are you going to [ stay at home ] ? S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span> ... visit a new city. ...stay in a hotel. .. camp in the mountais. ..stay in a tent 2007 IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 13 Do ex 1,2 P 114 14 Prepare Lesson 2 A4-5. Date: 29/3/ Period 85 Unit 14 : making plans. Lesson2 : A4-5 P 142-143 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the details text and practice ‘’going to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally. I.Knowledges : ’going to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally. II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan, spare table. B. Procedures : I. Settlement II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Pre- reading Pre-teach - The beach (example ) - A temple ( picture). -.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span> T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : Matching Asks Ss to match the word in the column A with the word in the column B A B Ha long bay Hue. Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook Work in groups to play this game. Ben thanh market Nha trang The beach HCM city. Ss listen and order the places. The citadel Quang ninh Ngoc son temple Ha noi Ordering : -T says : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places you’ve matched in the summer vacation 1 2 3 4 5 2. While –reading : A4 - P 142 -Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text , -Asks Ss to read the text to check their order the places then asks Ss to fill in the correct order in the column one of the gird below with answer keys Places to visit Where to stay How long What to do First. Read the text to check their order the places and practice the text Then fill in the correct order in the column one of the gird below in individually. Work in individually to change information from the text on P.142 change Phuong and Mai to “ I” and replacecing their vacation plan with the student’s own plans.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span> Then Next After that finally Ha long Ha noi Hue Nha trang HCM 4. Post reading : TRansformation writing: -Asks Ss to change information from the text on P.142 change Phuong and Mai to “ I” and replacecing their vacation plan with the student’s own plans Keys : I ..... IV. Consolidation:  Asks Ss to write vocabulary. V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 2  Do ex 3 P 114 (work book) Date: 29/3/2007 Period 86 Unit 14 : making plans. Lesson3 :B1--4 P 144-145 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further speaking to talk about plans for the near future I.Knowledges : ‘’going to ‘’ future II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I. Settlement II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Review.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span> Finding friends :(with answer keys ) Asks Ss to complete the table following example exchange : S1: What are you going to do tomorrow? S2: I’m going to [do my homework] homework My friend A soocer match A movie badminton My mon walking. Work in individually to complete the table following example exchange : S1: What are you going to do tomorrow? S2: I’m going to [do my homework. See    . Work in pairs to predict the dialogue. Play. . Ss copy down the dialogue and Then fill in the gaps in pairs then practice the dia in pairs. Do . Visit . Work in groups to play this game Example exchange : S1: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping S2: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping and on Sunday afternoon I’m.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span> going watch TV.  Help  Go  watch   2 Practice : Predict dialogue : -Asks Ss to predict the dialogue Tuan: What are you going to do tonight? Lan: I;m going to ...................... Tuan : What are you going to do tomorrow ? Lan: It’s Sunday .I’m going to .................Then we’re going to .......what about you? Tuan : Tonight , I’m going to ....... tomorrow, I’m going to............ Mapped dialogue B2 P 144 -Asks Ss to make the dialogue Example exchange : .... tonight ? ...see a movie . . ...... tonight ? ...help my Mom .........tomorrow? ..... go walking . ........tomorrow? ..play volleyball S1: What are you going to do tonight ? S2: I;m going to see a movie .What are you going to do tonight ? S1: I;m going to help my mom .What are you going to ? S2: ect..... 4.Chain game : -Asks Ss to practice in pairs ,using the sentences Example exchange : S1: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping S2: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping and on Sunday.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span> afternoon I’m going watch TV. IV. Consolidation:  The form ‘going to ‘’. V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 4  Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work bo. Date : 5 /4/2007 Period 87 Unit14. making plans. Lesson 4 B5-6 (*P. 145-146) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further listening and reading practice with 'going to ' I Knowledges: ''going to ''. II Skills: reading and listening III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Check the form What are you going to do tomorrow? III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities -1 Review : Survey -Asks Ss to practice the structure What are you going to do .... name tonight On Sunday On Saturday In the summer vacation. Students' activities. Work in pairs to practice the structure What are you going to do ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span> me 2 Pre -reading *Pre -teach: (to ) bring ( translation): mang (to ) take a photo (mime): chôp ¶nh a camera ( picture/ realia): m¸y ¶nh T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : what and where Bring. take a photo. a camera. Pre questions -T says : Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic 1 Where are they going to ? 2 What three things are they going to bring ? 3 What are they going to there? 3 While -reading : _T reads the text ,asks Ss to read to check their prediction Answer keys : 1 .near a lake 2 .a camera , food and drink 3. take a photos 4 Pre-listening: Brainstorm. Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks Work in groups tp play this game Work in individually to these answer questions. Listen and check their prediction ,then practice the text Work in individually To write vocabulary A tent ,a kite , food ..... Things to bring for a camping vacation -Then asks Ss to predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga bring Vui a ball Ly a camera Lan some food Mai some drink Nga a tent 5 While-listening :. Then predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga bring. Work in pairs to listen to the tape to check their prediction.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span> B6 P.145 -Asks Ss to listen to the tape to check their prediction Answer keys : Vui: a tent ,some food Ly : a camera Lan : a ball Mai and Nga : some drink : IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 15 Do ex 3,4 P 115 16 Prepare Lesson 5. Date : 5 /4/2007 Period 88 Unit14. making plans. Lesson 5: C1-3 (*P. 147) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to make suggestions with ‘Let’s..’’ and respond, further practice in ‘want to (do) ' I Knowledges: '‘Let’s..’’ ‘want to (do) ' . II Skills: Speaking III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities 1 Presentation : *Pre -teach: by minibus ( example) : b»ng xe buýt nhá a pagoda ( picture): chïa too ( synonym very ) : rÊt too far ( example ) : rÊt xa T uses the techniques to elicit each word. Students' activities. Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span> T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check : ROR by minibus. a pagoda. Work in groups tp play this game. too far. Pre questions -T says : Ba,Lan and Nam are going to have a picnic 1 Where are they going to go ? 2 How are they going to travel? Presentation dialogue _T reads the dialogue ,asks Ss to check their prediction Answer keys : 1 Huong pagoda 2 by minibus _Asks Ss to answer the questions C2 P .148 in the text book Answer keys : a Nam wants to go to Hue b Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda c Lan wants to walk d Because it’s too far e By bike f Because it’s too hot g Ba wants to travel by minibus  Model sentences : -17Let’s go camping Walk there -18That’s a good idea -19No,I dont’ want to 2 Practice : Picture drill C3 a-f P.148-149 with work cue Yes/no Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1: Let’s go to the beach S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to 3 Production : Mapped dialogue You Your friend See a movie no..go to the beach. Work in individually to answer these questions by predicting. Listen and check their prediction ,then practice the dialogue Work in pair to answer the questions. Listen and copy down. Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1: Let’s go to the beach S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to. Work in pairs to make the.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span> No...too hot Go to the museun No..go by minibus. dialogue Yes ...walk Yes. IV Consolidation: V, Homework: 20 Do ex 5 P 115 21 Prepare Lesson 6. Date : 5 /4/2007 Period 89 Unit14. making plans. Lesson 6: Grammar practice (*P. 150-153) A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in Present simple,Adv of frequency,Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather I Knowledges: Present simple,Adv of frequency. Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather . II Skills: Speaking and writing III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. AsksSs to write vocabulary III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities 1 Present simple: Survey: Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1: What sports do you like ? S2: Football S1: What sports don’t you like ? S2: swimming Like.....  .....don’t like....... Students' activities. Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1: What sports do you like ? S2: Football S1: What sports don’t you like ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span> S2: swimming Name Sports   Season   Food   Drink  . Work in individually to write it upfollowing example exchange Ha likes football but she doesn’t like swimming Work in groups to play this game. Ha Football  Swimming. Work in groups to play this game following example exchange S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]? S2 : Twice a week. -Asks Ss to write it up following example exchange Ha likes football but she doesn’t like swimming 2 Adv of frequency: Asks Ss to play the game STB Lu«n lu«n hai lÇn mét tuÇn. kh«ng bao giê thêng xuyªn. thØnh tho¶ng mét lÇn trong n¨m. Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1:What are you going to do ? S2 : I’m going to [ play football ] Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6] S2: That’s right but today he is ] [getting up at 7].

<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span> 3 Grammar. practice :. Asks Ss to play the game noughts and crosses following example exchange S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]? S2 : Twice a week TV? The movies ? the store? Swimming ?. your mom?. Fishing?. Table tennis? Caping ? badmonton ? 4 Future ‘going to ‘’ : Picture drill 4 P.151-152 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1! What are you going to do ? S2 : I’m going to [ play football 5 Present progressive : -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6 ] S2: That’s right but today he is ] [getting up at 7] a. get up at 6/get up at 7 b. go to school/ go camping c. have rice for lunch/ have a picnic 6 future plans and the weather -Asks Ss to answer the questions 1 Where are you going to do ? 2 Who are you going to with ? 3 What season are you going to go in? 4 What ‘s the weather like then? 5 What are you going to bring with you ? Example : I’m going to go to Sapa with my friends. We are going to in the spring .It’s cool but we like cool weather ... IV Consolidation: Present simple,Adv of frequency. Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather V, Homework: 22 Prepare unit 15 Lesson. Work in individually toanswer the questions then write a pharagraph.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span> Date : 10 /4/2007 Period 90 45 minute test A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , T can check Ss’ understanding and help Ss review the structures they’ve learned I . Knowledge: vocab and structures in unit 12-14 II. Skills : writing III. Preparation: test papers B. Contents: I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) 1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many 2, She ............sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked 3, They .....playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going 4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for 5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how 6, Let’s ........to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go 7, How ...............is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often 8, He .......TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is watching II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m) 1, We...............................(play) volleyball now. 2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple. 3, How ...........Lan.............(travel) to school? 4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer . III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms): A B 1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV 2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk . 3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week 4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather 5, What would you like? e, Two kilos 6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m): Nga is a teacher,so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span> 1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat. 2, She is going to travel by coach. 3, She is going to visit Da lat for three days. 4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city. V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m) ................................. ....................................... 45 minute test Student’s name : Class : 6 Mark. ...................................................... Teacher’s mark. I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) 1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old many 2, She ............sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking liked 3, They .....playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am going 4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from 5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where 6, Let’s ........to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes go 7, How ...............is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many often 8, He .......TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching watching II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m) 1, We...............................(play) volleyball now. 2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple. 3, How ........... ........Lan.............(travel) to school? 4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer . III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms): A B 1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV 2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk . 3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week 4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather 5, What would you like? e, Two kilos. d, d, d, d, for d, how d, to d, d, is.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span> 6, How much rice do you want?. f, He plays tennis when it’s cold. IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m): Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach. 1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat. 2, She is going to travel by coach. 3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days. 4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city. V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m) .................................................................................................................................................. ......... Date: 19/4/2007 Period 92 Unit 15 : countries. Lesson 3 :A5 P 156 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a post card about being on vacation I.Knowledges : Countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary II. Skill: writing III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1 Revision : Work cue drill: -Asks Ss to pratice the structure following example exchange : S1: Where is Hoa from ? S2: She is from Viet nam S1: What language does she speak ? S2 : She speaks Viet namese . a. Hoa/Viet nam b. Tomiko/ Japan. Work in pairs to pratice the structure following example exchange : S1: Where is Hoa from ? S2: She is from Viet nam S1: What language does she speak ? S2 : She speaks Viet.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span> c. Jo/ Australia d. John/ Britain e. Susan/ Canada 2.Pre-writing : Pre-teach: A post card (real): (to )be on vacation (Example ): wet (example) : a lot of (synonym: many): interesting places (example): T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: What and where be on vacation. wet. namese .. Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook Work in groups to play this game. interesting places a lot of Work in pairs to read the text to answer the questions (with answer keys. -Asks Ss to read the text to answer the questions (with answer keys a. Who is the post card from ? ( Nhan) b. Where is he ? ( in london) c. What is the weather like? (cool and wet d. Is he travelling by train ? ( no,by bus ) e. Who’s the postcard to ? ( Minh )  Matching -Asks Ss to put the words into three columns (with answer Work in individually to keys) put the words into three Country City interesting places columns Japan Tokyo Mount Fujiama Viet nam Hue The citadel The USA New york The statue of Liberty China Beijing The great wall 2 While-writing : Transformation writing” -Asks Ss to write 3 Post –wrting : Exhibition -T corrects their mistakes. Work in groups to write Stick their poster on the board to correct each other.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span> V. Consolidation:  Vocabulary V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34  Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book). Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 93 Unit15. countries. Lesson 3: B1 P. 158 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to compare places ,using the comparative and superrlative adj of one syllable. I Knowledges: comparative and superrlative adj of one syllable. II Skills: Speaking III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities 1 Revision: Matching -Asks Ss to choose the adjs which best describe the cities (a city can have more than one adj hot Hue wet HCM city cold Hoi an big Sapa small Ha noi long xuyen 2 Presentation : Presentation Text -Reads the text, asks Ss to practice. Students' activities. Work in individually to choose the adjs which best describe the cities (a city can have more than one adj ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span> Models : 1: Adj + er : smaller, cloder 2: Adj +est : smallest. clodest Note: Double last letter +er : thinner, bigger 3 Practice: word cue drill -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang S2: But HCM city is the biggest a. Da nang Ha noi HCM city (big) b. Ha noi Uong bi Sapa (clod ) c. Vinh Long xuyen Hoi an (small) d. Ha noi Can tho Hue ( wet) 4 Further practice : Answer given _T gives the answer asks Ss to make questions with answer keys a. Phanxipang What’s the tallest mountain in Viet nam? b.The Mekong What’s the biggest river in Viet nam? c. Hue What’s the wettest city in Viet nam? d. Sapa Whast’s the clodest town in Viet nam? e. HCM city What’s the biggest city in Viet nam? -Asks Ss to play Noughts and crosses by comparing their home town with towm in the box Ha noi Hue Sapa HCM city Hai phong. Da nang Can tho. IV Consolidation: Check the models V, Homework: 23 Do ex 1,2 P 129 24 Prepare Lesson 4 Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 94. Hoi an Da lat. Listen and copy down the models. Work in pair to practice the structure following exaple exchange S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang S2: But HCM city is the biggest. Work in pairs to make questions. Work in groups to play game Example : Ha noi is bigger than Quang tri.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span> Unit15. countries. Lesson 4: B2-5 P. 159-161 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to read facts about famous places in the world and practice comparatives I Knowledges: comparative . II Skills: Reading and Speaking III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write the sentences from the cue words Ha noi / small/ Hcm city HCM city /biggest city III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities 1 Revision: Lucky numbers -Asks Ss to play this game by asking and answering questions 1. What’s the biggest city in Viet nam ? (HCM ) 2. What’s the biggest city in Britain? (Lon don) 3. What’s the biggest city in Japan ? ( Tokyo) 4. LN 5. What’s the tallest mountain you know? 6. LN 7. What’s the wettest you know? 8. Which one ‘s colder : Can tho or Sapa? 2 Pre-reading : *Pre -teach: high (example) : cao long (mime) : dµi thick (example): dµy over a million (translation) : mét triÖu -T uses the techniques to elicit each word -T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually. Students' activities. Work in groups to play this game 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span> -T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress -T asks Ss to copy Check : Wordsquare _Asks Ss to find out the words W E T B I G C T H I C K L O N G E R L V O L D X A E D L O C T R. Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks. Work in groups to find out the words. Work in individually to put the cities in order : biggest first. Work in individually to answer the questions in B2 P.159. Work in individuallylook at the text to guess the meaning of 1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span> H I G H. 4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure. Keys :  wet, big, thick, long, longer, old, high  over,big, do, no  cool  tall  cold Odering: _Asks Ss to put the cities in order : biggest first HCM, LONDON, TOKYO, HANOI, MEXICO. 3While-reading :B2 P.159 -Asks Ss to read the text to check their order Keys : 1-MEXICO, 2-TOKYO,3-LONDON, 4-HCM, 5HANOI -Asks Ss to answer the questions in B2 P.159 Answer Keys : a.No,it is not b.It’s MEXICO c. Tokyo is bigger than London 4 Post -reading : guess from the cotext -Asks Ss to look at the text and pictures to guess the meaning of 1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building 4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure _ IV Consolidation: Check vocabulary V, Homework: 25 Do ex 3 P.129-130 26 Prepare Lesson 5. Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 95 Unit15. countries. Lesson 5: C1-2 P. 162-164 A.Objectives:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span> By the end of this lesson Ss will be describe Viet nam use “ lots of...” as a quantitier I Knowledges: Lots of , Geography vocabulary . II Skills: Speaking and writing III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write vocabulary III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities. Students' activities. 1 Revision: Slap the board -Asks Ss to play this game by listening and slapping in the words Work in groups to play this game beautiful green rivers lakes beaches. fields mountains. 2 Presentation : *Pre -teach: a forest (picture): c¸nh rõng a desert ( translation): sa m¹c (to ) rain ( picture ): ma great (a) (example): vĩ đại ,to lớn lots of ( synonym: alot of ,many) : nhiÒu -T uses the techniques to elicit each word -T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually -T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress -T asks Ss to copy Check : R.O.R -Asks Ss to read the text to answer the question What are the 6 ‘natural features’ Lan tells us about ? Keys : 1 mountains 4 rain. Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, in individually Then copy down on their notebooks. Work in groups to play this game Work in individually to read the text to answer the question.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span> 2 rivers 5 forest 3 lakes 6 forest Model sentences : We have lots of mountains, rivers, forests. Rain. 3 Practice : Picture drill C2 P.164 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ? S2: Yes, it does . T/F repetition drill: -Asks Ss to listen and repeat if the sentences which T reads is right and keep silent if it wrong Example : T : There are lots of beaches in Da nang There are lots of forests in Ha noi There are lots of lakes in Ha noi 4 Production : Noughts and Crosses -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam? S2: Yes/ No, there are. Mountains Beaches Trees. rivers. forests. rain. building. interesting places. ‘’What are the 6 ‘natural features’ Lan tells us about ?’' Listen and copy down it Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange : S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ? S2: Yes, it does . Listen and repeat if the sentences which T reads is right and keep silent if it wrong Repeat silent Repeat Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam? S2: Yes/ No, there are.. lakes. IV Consolidation: Check vocabulary and the structure have lots of + nouns V, Homework: 27 Do ex 1,2 P.130 28 Prepare Lesson 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span> Date : 20 /4/2007 Period 96 Unit15. countries. Lesson 6: C3 P. 165 A.Objectives: By the end of this lesson Ss will be understand the text about the world’s great rives and mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and superlatives I Knowledges: .comparatives and superlatives II Skills: Reading III Preperation: Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures Students: Book B.Procedures: I,Settlement Greeting Check attandence II,Checking. Asks Ss to write sentences with the cue words Viet nam /have /lots of/ rain III,New lesson:. Teacher's activities 1 Revision: Wordsquare -Asks Ss to find out the words in the box R I V E R S W C M S T A R T S H. Students' activities Work in individually to find out the words. Listen and repeat in choral, in groups, and in individually Then copy down on their notebooks.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span> E L B E A C H I T R E E I G I N E I R O N E G A R G L O T S H I S D L R O W. Work in groups to play this game. Work in groups to predict these sentences are T or F. Work in pairs to read the text to check their predictions and then read the text again to answer the question in the text book. Work in groups to play the game.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span> X F Answer keys :  great, long  world  girl  meters, rain, high, China, of, or  river, rivers starts, beach, tree, in, lots , on 2 Pre-reading: *Pre -teach: the sea (picture): biÓn Tibet ( translation): t©y t¹ng (to ) flow to ( mime): chaû North Afica: b¾c mü -T uses the techniques to elicit each word -T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually -T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress -T asks Ss to copy Check : What and Where the sea. Tibet. North Afica. T/ F predictions: -Asks Ss to predict these sentences are T or F 1. There are two great rivers in viet nam. 2 The Red river is longer than the Mekong river . 3 The Red river and the Mekong both start in China 4 The longest river in the world os not in Viet nam 5 Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world 3While -reading : C3 p.165 -Asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction s Answer keys : 1T 2F 3F 4 T 5 F -Asks Ss to read the text again to answer the question in the text book C3 P. 165 Answer keys a.The Mekong river b. The Mekong starts in Tibet c. The Nile river is the longest in the world d. The Nile river flow to the Mediterrrannean sea E Moun Everest is the highest mountain in the world f Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet nam.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span> 4 Post-reading : Lucky number -Asks Ss to play this game by amswering these questions . a. LN b. What are the two great rivers in Viet nam ? c. Where does the Red river start ? d. LN e. What does the Red river flow to ? f. W hat does the Nile start and flow to ? g. LN h. Make a sentences about the lonhest river in Viet nam? IV Consolidation: Check vocabulary V, Homework: 29 Do ex 3 P.130 30 Prepare unit 16 Lesson 1. Date: 19/4/2007 Period 97 Unit 16 countries. Lesson 1 :A1-3 P 166-167 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about food with countable and uncountable quantifiers I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few II. Skill: speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I. Settlement II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1 Revision : Jumble Words: -Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order toespota = potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers. Work in groups to rewrite the words in.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(201)</span> motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions tableveges = vegetables 2.Presentation : Presentation text : A1 p.166 -Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice the text Model sentences : a. How much rice is there ? There is some A lot of A little rice. the order. Ss listen , and practice the text ,then give examples Ss copy down on their notebook. b. How many eggs are there ? There are some Alot of eggs A few Work in pairs to match 3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167 - Asks Ss to match the sentences to the Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e Picture drill: A1 p.166 and A3 P.167 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S 1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are a few. Work in pairs to to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: How much ricwe is there? S2: There is alot/ lots S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are afew Work in groups to play chain game. 4 Production : Chain game : -Asks Ss to play chain game Example : S1 : There is a little rice S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a few eggs.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(202)</span> IV. Consolidation:  Vocabulary V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34  Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book). Date: 19/4/2007 Period 98 Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT. Lesson 2 :A2 P 166-167 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the text about farming and getting further practice in alot, alittle, a few I.Knowledges : a lot, a little, a few II. Skill: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1 Revision : Noughts and crosses : -Asks Ss to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]'' a dozen eggs. two potatoes. 1/2 a glass of milk. 1/2 kilo onions. 100 g rice. 4 kilos vegetables. 1 kilo fruit. 2 tomatoes. 2.Pre-reading : Pre-teach. 2 flowers. Work in groups to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]''.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(203)</span> animals (picture): a buffalow (picture): a cow (picture): ( to ) flow (picture): (to ) pull a cart (picture): (to ) grow (picture): (to ) procedure (picture): - T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: Net work. Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook. Work in individually to write vocab. animals grow. on the farm. fruit / rice / vegetables. procedure. *open -prediction : -Asks Ss to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5 things he has procedures with answer keys Mr Hai has Mr Hai procedures 1 paddy fields rice 2 a small vegetable field vegetables 3 fruit trees fruit 4 buffalow milk 5 cows eggs 6 chickens 3 While -reading: -Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. - asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions 3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167 - Asks Ss to match the sentences to the picture Answer keys : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e Picture drill: A1 p.166 and A3 P.167 -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange : S 1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots. Work in groups to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5 things he has procedures. Listen and reads the text to check their predictions work in pairs to match the sentences to the picture Work in pairs to practice the structure following example exchange : S1: How much rice is there? S2: There is alot/ lots.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(204)</span> S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are afew 4 Production : Chain game : -Asks Ss to play chain game Example : S1 : There is a little rice S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a few eggs IV. Consolidation:  Vocabulary V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34  Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book). S1: How many onions are there ? S2 : There are a few Work in groups to play chain game.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(205)</span> Date: 29/4/2007 Period 99 Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT. Lesson 3 :A4-5 P 168 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas in terms of cause and effectof the text about the environment I.Knowledges : Why ...? Because ...... II. Skill: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : II. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1 Revision :matching -Asks Ss to match Viet namese with EL words the population rõng forests trång the world n«ng d©n farmer grow d©n sè fields con vËt food thøc ¨n animals thÕ giíi 2.Pre-reading : Pre-teach land (picture): đất đai plants(picture): thùc vËt ( to )burn (picture): đốt cháy (to ) destroy( translation): ph¸ huû (to ) cut down (synomyn: grow ): chÆt ph¸ in danger( example): mèi nguy hiÓm - T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy Check: What and where. Work in groups to match Viet namese with EL words. Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook. Work in groups to play this game.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(206)</span> land. plants. destroy. in danger. burn cut down.  ordering: -Asks Ss order the words 1.produce 2.cut down 3. more food 4. burn 5. grow 6. make new fields 7. animals and plants in danger. 3 While -reading: A4 p. 168 -Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. - asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions Answer keys : 1. Because we grow trees 2. Because we need wood 3. Because we are destroyingthe forests 4 Post -reading : Picture story Asks Ss to retell story,using their words. IV. Consolidation:  Vocabulary V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 16 Lesson4  Do ex (work book). Work in groups order the words 5-3- 2- 6 -1-7. Listen and reads the text to check their predictions Then answer the questions. Work in groups to retell story,using their words.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(207)</span> Date: 29/4 Period 100 Unit 16. MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT. Lesson 4 :B1 P 169 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas about the pollution I.Knowledges : pollution vocabulary II. Skill: reading III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : III. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1 Revision :STB -Asks Ss to play this game ph¸ huû. đốn cây. mèi nguy hiÓm. đốt cháy. s¶n xuÊt c©y. convËt. Work in groups to match Viet namese with EL words. đất đai. 2.Pre-reading : Pre-teach The enviroment (trasnlation): m«i trêng The ocean (synomyn: sea ): đại dơng ( to) pollute (example):oo nhiÔm (to) waste (translation): l¶ng phÝ the air(example): kh«ng khÝ coal( realia): than đá oil( realia):dÇu gas (translation): ga power (example ): - T uses the techniques to elicit each word T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus and then individually T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress T asks Ss to copy. Ss listen and repeat in chorus and then individually Ss copy down on their notebook. Work in groups to play this game.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(208)</span> Check: What and where gas the air. oil waste. coal ocean. power.  Pre questions -Predict : -Asks SS to predict the answers with answer keys 1.What are we destroying ? - forests, wild animals, plants 2.What are we wasting ? - water, coal, oil , gas 3. What are we polluting ? - the air, the land, the rivers, the oceans 3 While -reading: B1 P.169 -Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions. - asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions Answer keys : 4. a. Because we are destroying 5. b. Gases is polluting the air 6. c. 4 Post -reading : Write it up -Asks Ss to use the predict pre questions to make a list of ‘’ don’ts ‘’ Example : Don’t destroy our environment Don’t destroy the forest Don’t destroy the plants Don’t destroythe wild animals Don’t waste water Don’t pollute the air Don’t pollute the oceans IV. Consolidation:  Vocabulary V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5  Do ex (work book). Work in groups to predict the answers. Listen and reads the text to check their predictions Then answer the questions. Work in groups to use the predict pre questions to make a list of ‘’ don’ts ‘.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(209)</span> Date: 29/4 Period 101 Unit 16. MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT. Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to give advice about protecting the environment I.Knowledges : Should and shouldn’t. II. Skill: Speaking III. Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : IV. Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : Asks Ss to write voca . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1 Revision :Noughts and crosses -Asks Ss to play this game by using ‘’Don’t .......’’ plants water the air power forests. wild animals coal. the oceans. Work in groups to play this game by using ‘’Don’t .......’’ Example : Don’t destroy plants. trash. Example : Don’t destroy plants 2.Presentation :B2 P.170-171 -Reads the text , asks Ss to guess the new words from context with answer keys (to) throw = nÐm (to) pick = nhÆt (to) damage= ph¸ huû, lµm háng (to) keep off = tr¸nh khái (to) save = tiÕt kiÖm (to) collect = thu gom -Asks Ss to match the rulres with these signs Answer keys :. Ss listen and guess the new words from context. Work in individually tomatch.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(210)</span> a- picture c b- picture f c- picture a d- picture h e- picture e f- picture b g - pictureg h- picture d *Model sentences : We should collect paper Save water We shouldn’t throw trash on the streets damage trees. 3 Practice: -Asks Ss to match and write these sentences with should and shouldn’t 7. Example : 8. We should collect paper Should damage trash 9. collect trees 10. throw paper Shouldn’t save flowers 11. pick bottles and cans Picture drill : -Asks Ss to practice the structure following example S1: We shouldn’t [ damage trees ] S2: That’s right 4 Further practice : Noughts and crosses -Asks Ss to play this game damage save waster destroy. pollute. throw cut down Example : We should/shouldn’t .... IV. Consolidation:  Vocabulary V. Homework:  Prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5  Do ex (work book). Date: 2/5/2007 Period 103. collect pick. the rulres with these signs. Listen and copy donw the sentences Work in individually to match and write these sentences with should and shouldn’t We should collect paper We shouldn’t throw trash. Work in pairs to practice the structure following example S1: We shouldn’t [ damage trees ] S2: That’s right Work in groups to play this game.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(211)</span> Unit 16. MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT. Lesson 5 :B2 P 170-171 A Objective: By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice present simple and progressive , comparative and superlatives, quantifiers and countability. I.Knowledges : Country, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary. II.Skill: Speaking and writing III.Preparation : Book, board, lesson plan,. B. Procedures : I.Settlement Greeting Check attandence II.Checking : . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Countries and Languages: *Simple present : -T recalls the way to use this tense Form: S + V-s/es Uses: miêu tả hành động thờng xuyên xãy ra. T-Whole class. Work in groups to to do exercise 1p.174 (text book). Countries and Languages Japanese Japan -Ask ss to do exercise 1p.174 (text book) Answerkey: a.Are... from/ Am not/ speak b.Speaks c.Is Chinese e.Is Vietnamese d.Is Japanese f.Is American 2.Present simple and present progressive: +Mapped dialouge:. . ........name? ........Live ? .......Stay now? .......do ? What....teach ?. . Susan London Hanoi Teacher English. Work in pairs to mapped the dialouge.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(212)</span> ......teach you?. No, .....Mr Hai. Answer key: 1.What is her name? 2.Where does she live? 3.Where is she staying now? 4.What does she do? 5.What does she teach? 6.Does she teach you? -ask ss to do the exercise 2 P.174 (text book) 3.Adj: Comparative and superlatives: -Asks Ss to complete the table and then complete the passages. Long Longer Longest Short Tall Small Big High Thick a. The Mekong river is long. The Amazon river is ...than the Mekong. The Nile river is.....river in the world. b. The Great Wall of China is long. It is... ... structure in the world c. Sears Tower in Chicago is tall, but it isn’t .... ... building in the world. Petronas twin Tower in Kuala Lumpur is .... than Sears Tower. It is ... ... building in the world. d. Ha noi is gig, bt it is not the .... city in Viet nam. HCMC is ... than Hanoi. It is ... city invietnam. But Mexico city is.. ...city in the world. IV. Consolidation:. Work in individually to complete the table and then complete the passages..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(213)</span>  Vocabulary V. Homework:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(214)</span>

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×